hit counter script
Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Controller
  5. FX3G SERIES
  6. Programming manual

Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES Programming Manual

Programmable controllers
Hide thumbs Also See for FX3G SERIES:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: User Manual, Installation Manual
FX
/FX
/FX
SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
3G
3U
3UC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Basic & Applied Instructions Edition

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric FX3G SERIES

  • Page 1 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic & Applied Instructions Edition...
  • Page 3 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
  • Page 4 • Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference, please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents Related manuals ..........................14 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals ..............21 1. Introduction 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs ......................23 1.1.1 Types of programming languages......................23 1.1.2 Applicability of programming languages in programming software............
  • Page 6 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 4.4 State Relay [S] ............................91 4.4.1 Numbers of state relays .......................... 91 4.4.2 Functions and operation examples ......................92 4.5 Timer [T]..............................94 4.5.1 Numbers of timers........................... 94 4.5.2 Functions and operation examples ......................
  • Page 7 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) ....... 151 5.1.1 Types of numeric values ........................151 5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values.......................
  • Page 8 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump......................220 8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil.................. 224 8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction ..........
  • Page 9 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset......................317 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode ......................... 320 12.3 FNC 42 –...
  • Page 10 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block ..............449 15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details) ..........452 15.10 FNC 79 –...
  • Page 11 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return..................549 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning....................551 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode.................. 553 20.4 FNC155 –...
  • Page 12 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings ............635 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search..................638 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer .................. 640 27.
  • Page 13 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 34. FX -CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 34.1 FNC 300 – FLCRT / File create•check ....................741 34.1.1 Detailed explanation of setting data ....................742 34.2 FNC 301 –...
  • Page 14 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) ..............856 37.2.1 RUN monitor and initial pulse [M8000 to M8003]................856 37.2.2 Watchdog timer [D8000] ........................857 37.2.3 Battery voltage low detection [M8005 and M8006] ................
  • Page 15 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time Appendix B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time ..................908 Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time................914 Appendix B-3 Label (P/I) Execution Time ....................914 Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time ..................

  • Page 16: Related Manuals

    Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Related manuals For detailed explanation of programming (basic instructions, applied instructions and step ladder instructions) in FX PLCs, refer to this manual. For hardware information on the PLC main unit, special extension units, etc., refer to each associated manual.
  • Page 17 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Manuals for communication control Common Details about simple N : N link, parallel link, Additional FX Series User’s Manual -...
  • Page 18 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Handling procedures of the RS-485 communication special adapter.
  • Page 19 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog input Supplied -4AD-ADP special adapter.
  • Page 20 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Analog I/O (mixed) When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each product is connected.
  • Page 21 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Manuals for FX -20SSC-H positioning Block Handling procedures of the 2-axis positioning Supplied -20SSC-H...
  • Page 22 Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Essential manual Manual required depending on application Manual with additional manual for detailed explanation Manual Model name Manual name Contents number code Memory cassette Supplied Memory cassette Specifications and operating procedures of the −...

  • Page 23: Generic Names And Abbreviations Used In Manuals

    Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation/generic name Name Programmable controllers Series Generic name of FX Series PLCs PLC or main unit Generic name of FX Series PLC main units Series...
  • Page 24 Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Abbreviation/generic name Name Open field networks CC-Link and CC-Link/LT CC-Link equipment Generic name of CC-Link master station and CC-Link remote stations Generic name of CC-Link master station (having following model name): CC-Link master (station) -16CCL-M CC-Link remote station...

  • Page 25: Introduction

    Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs Introduction This chapter explains basic items related to programming in FX , FX and FX programmable controllers (PLCs). Programming Language in PLCs This section explains the features of programming in FX , FX and FX...

  • Page 26: Applicability Of Programming Languages In Programming Software

    Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs 4. ST (structured text) The ST language is a text language with a similar grammatical structure to the C language. Features The ST language can describe control achieved by syntax using selective branches with conditional statements and repetition by repetitive statements in the same way as high-level languages such as the C language.

  • Page 27: Overview (Sequence Program)

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions Overview (Sequence Program) This chapter explains the basic functions of FX PLCs. This chapter includes not only the features of PLCs but also introduction of representative functions, parameters and memory to utilize the functions of PLCs.

  • Page 28: Convenient Functions For Output Processing

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions 5. Three types of "interrupt" functions for receiving short-period pulses and priority processing → Refer to Chapter 36. Input interrupt Signals from specific input relays are monitored.

  • Page 29: Introduction Of Applied Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 4. Registration of "entry code" for protecting programs The entry code can be registered to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of created sequence programs. With regard to online operations from GX Developer (Ver.
  • Page 30 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 3. Arithmetic and logical operations 7. Handy instructions and instructions for external devices • Addition (ADD/FNC 20) • Initial state (IST/FNC 60) •...

  • Page 31: Analog/Positioning Special Control

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control Analog/Positioning Special Control For details, refer to the manual of each product. 1. Analog I/O control • Pulse output block (controlled by sequence program) •...

  • Page 32: Introduction Of Devices Constructing Plc

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC Many relays, timers, and counters are built into an FX PLC, with many NO (normally open) contacts and NC (normally closed) contacts.

  • Page 33: Device List

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC 2.5.2 Device list 1. Input relays (X) and output relays (Y) 5. Counters (C) → Refer to Section 4.2. The following types of counters are provided, and can be used in accordance with the purpose or •...
  • Page 34 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC 8. Index registers (V)(Z) → Refer to Section 4.11. Among registers, there are index type registers V and Z used for modification. A data register V or Z is added to another device as follows: [In the case of "V0, Z0 = 5"]...

  • Page 35: Program Memory And Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices Program Memory and Devices 2.6.1 Memory structure 1. In FX PLCs PLCs are equipped with the RAM memory as standard. By mounting a memory cassette, the memory type can be changed.
  • Page 36 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices When using an attached memory cassette (does not use the built-in program memory) System ROM Built-in device memory (RAM) [Bit device memory] [Data memory] •...
  • Page 37 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2. In FX PLCs PLCs are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard. When using the built-in memory (without attached memory cassette) System ROM Built-in device memory (RAM, EEPROM) [Bit device memory]...

  • Page 38: Memory Operations And Latched (Battery Or Eeprom Backed) Devices (Power On/Off And Run/Stop)

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2.6.2 Memory operations and latched (battery or EEPROM backed) devices (power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP) 1. Backup operation The operations of the data memory, bit device memory and program memory in FX PLCs are classified as shown below: Types of program memory...
  • Page 39 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices Caution Programs (when a memory cassette is not attached), latched (battery backed) type device values and clock data is not backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes low due to expiration of the battery life or another reason.
  • Page 40 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices Types of bit device memory a) FX Power Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP OFF→ON Does not Cleared. change. Input relay (X) Cleared.
  • Page 41 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices b) FX PLCs Power Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP OFF→ON Does not Cleared. change. Input relay (X) Cleared. Does not change while M8033 is Does not Cleared.

  • Page 42: Types Of Backup Methods Against Power Failure

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2.6.3 Types of backup methods against power failure There are the following types of latch (battery backup) for the program memory and built-in PLC devices. 1.

  • Page 43: Change Between General Devices And Latched (Battery Backed) Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices 2.6.4 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices 1. When using latched (battery backed) type devices as non-latch type devices In FX PLCs, some latched (battery backed) type devices can be changed into non-latch type devices by the parameter settings.

  • Page 44: Types And Setting Of Parameters

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Types and Setting of Parameters Setting of parameters means setting the environment where the PLC operates. Almost all FX PLCs can be used with factory default values. However, when it is necessary to attach a memory cassette, set the comment capacity, set the communication condition for serial ports, etc., the parameter settings must be changed using a programming tool such as personal computer.
  • Page 45 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Classification Item Description This parameter corresponds to the following settings by specifying the contents of each on the PLC system Serial port PC screen: setting (2)

  • Page 46: Parameter Initial Values And Available Tools For Changing Parameter Values

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2.7.2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values Programming tool Display unit FX-10P GOT-F900 GX Developer Setting Item FX-PCS/...
  • Page 47 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters PLCs Programming tool Display unit FX-10P GOT-F900 GX Developer Setting Item *1*2 FX-PCS/ (-E) Series Initial value range FX-30P FX-20P 1000 ET-940...

  • Page 48: Memory Capacity Setting Range

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2.7.3 Memory capacity setting range Built-in memory capacity Can be set by changing parameter. Memory capacity setting Special unit Positioning Built-in CC-Link/ Comment...

  • Page 49: Compatible Optional Memory Model

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2.7.4 Compatible optional memory model 1. FX PLCs Maximum number of Allowable number of Model name Memory type Remarks steps times of writing EEPROM...

  • Page 50: Keyword (Entry Code)

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2.7.5 Keyword (entry code) By registering the entry code in a PLC, the functions of programming tools, display modules, and display units to change programs, monitor devices, and the current value changing function in the PLC can be restricted (access restriction).

  • Page 51: Data Operation - Fnc 40 To Fnc

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 3. Entry code setting and access restriction Setting status Peripheral equipment and access restriction The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected registration condition: Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset.
  • Page 52 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Registering and changing the entry codes This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A) → For the entry code registration/change procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product.
  • Page 53 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 4. Click [Execution] button to open "Keyword confirmation" dialog box. 5. Input the entry codes again. 6. Click [OK] to register the entry codes to the PLC. Reading/writing a program from/to a PLC with the entry codes registered This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A) →...
  • Page 54 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Canceling the entry codes This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.24A) → For the entry code canceling (deletion) procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), FX-30P, and FX-PCS/WIN(-E), refer to the manual of each product.

  • Page 55: Special Unit Initial Value Setting [Gx Developer Ver.8.24A Or Later]

    Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2.7.6 Special unit initial value setting [GX Developer Ver.8.24A or later] The initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) in special function blocks/units connected to an FX (Ver.2.20 or later) can be set as a parameter in GX Developer (Ver.8.24A or later).
  • Page 56 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting memory capacity This example shows a window in an PLC. Set item Contents of setting Setting range Memory capacity Set the program memory capacity.
  • Page 57 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting devices 1. Click "Device" tab, and set devices. The "Device" tab is available only in FX PLCs. This example shows a window in an PLC.
  • Page 58 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Assigning I/Os, setting the initial values for special units, and setting built-in CC-Link/LT 1. Click the "I/O assignment" tab, and then set the I/O assignment, special function block/unit names and built-in CC-Link/LT.
  • Page 59 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 2. On "Special Function Block Settings" dialog box, set the initial values of special function blocks and units. The "Special Function Block Settings" tab is available only in FX PLCs.
  • Page 60 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 3. Click [End] button to finish the setting and close "Special Function Block Settings" dialog box. 4. Set the built-in CC-Link/LT on the "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" dialog box. This item can be set only in the FX -32MT-LT-2.
  • Page 61 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting the PLC system (1) Click on the "PLC system (1)" tab to setup "Battery less mode", "MODEM initialized", and "RUN terminal input."...
  • Page 62 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters PLCs Set item Contents of setting Setting range Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery. When a check mark is put here, the battery error indicator lamp is automatically –...
  • Page 63 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting the PLC system (2) 1. Click "PLC system (2)" tab. 2. Only when a latch (battery backed) area for a serial port exists through an extended PLC, select a channel to be set and put a check mark next to "Operate communication setting."...
  • Page 64 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Setting positioning The positioning setting function is available in all FX PLCs and FX PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later. 1.
  • Page 65 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Set item Contents of setting Set range Set the bias speed for each set of output pulses. 1/10 or less of the Bias speed [Hz] Initial value: 0 maximum speed...
  • Page 66 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters 3. Click [Individual setting] button to display "Positioning instruction settings" dialog box. In this dialog box, set the positioning table for each pulse output destination. This example shows a window in an FX PLC.
  • Page 67 Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters Set item Contents of setting Setting range A check mark here means not to transfer the positioning setting when PLC turns Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC Check mark this box when changing the positioning setting from a display unit,...

  • Page 68: Instruction List

    Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions Instruction List This chapter introduces a list of instructions available in programming. Basic Instructions The basic instructions are provided in the following series. The table below shows differences in applicable devices. Applicable PLC Basic instructions other than MEP and MEF instructions...
  • Page 69 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference Connection Instruction Serial connection of AND Block – Section 7.7 multiple parallel circuits Parallel connection of OR Block –...

  • Page 70: Step Ladder Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.2 Step Ladder Instructions Step Ladder Instructions Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference Step Ladder Starts step ladder Chapter 35 STL Applicable devices Return Completes step ladder –...
  • Page 71 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 72 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 73 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 74 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 75 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 76 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 77 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 78 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 79 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 80 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 81 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 82 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.
  • Page 83 Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC *1: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver. 3.00 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX Series Ver.

  • Page 84: Devices In Detail

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List Devices in Detail This chapter explains how numeric values are handled in the PLC as well as the roles and functions of various built-in devices including I/O relays, auxiliary relays, state relays, counters and data registers.
  • Page 85 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List Device name Description Reference High-speed counter 8 points maximum can be used among C235 to C255 [latched 1-phase 1-counting input (battery backed) type]. C235 to C245 Bi-directional (32 bits) The setting can be changed between the latched (battery...
  • Page 86 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List PLCs Device name Description Reference I/O relay Input relay X000 to X177 128 points Device numbers are octal. Section 4.2 The total number of inputs and outputs is 128. Output relay Y000 to Y177 128 points...
  • Page 87 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List Device name Description Reference High-speed counter 1-phase 1-counting input Bi- directional (32 bits) C235 to C245 (EEPROM keep) −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts 1-phase 2-counting input Bi- Software counter directional (32 bits)

  • Page 88: I/O Relays [X, Y]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y] I/O Relays [X, Y] Some input relays and output relays are secured in the main unit, and others are assigned to extension devices according to the connection order.

  • Page 89: Functions And Roles

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y] 4.2.2 Functions and roles Examples of terminal names and wiring (sink input) are for the FX Series PLC. External power supply COM1 Program example...

  • Page 90: Operation Timing Of Input Relays

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y] 4.2.3 Operation timing of input relays The PLC executes sequence control by repeatedly executing the following processing procedure. In this batch I/O method, not only are there driving times of input filters and output devices but also response delays caused by operation cycles.

  • Page 91: Auxiliary Relay [M]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] Auxiliary Relay [M] There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC. Coils of auxiliary relays are driven by contacts of various devices inside the PLC in the same way as output relays.
  • Page 92 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] 2. Latched (battery backed) type When the power is turned OFF while the PLC is operating, all of the output relays and general type auxiliary relays turn OFF.

  • Page 93: State Relay [S]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] State Relay [S] State relays (S) are important devices to program stepping type process control simply, and combined with the step ladder instruction STL.

  • Page 94: Functions And Operation Examples

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] 4.4.2 Functions and operation examples 1. General type In the stepping type process control shown in the left Initial state figure, when the start signal X000 turns ON, the state relay Start S20 is set (turned ON) and the solenoid valve Y000 for X000...
  • Page 95 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S] 3. Annunciator type Annunciator type state relays can be used as outputs for external fault diagnosis. For example, when an external fault diagnosis circuit shown in the figure below is created and the contents of the special data register D8049 are monitored, the smallest number out of the active state relays S900 to S999 is stored in D8049.

  • Page 96: Timer [T]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] Timer [T] Timers add and count clock pulses of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, etc. inside the PLC. When the counted value reaches a specified set value, the output contact of the timer turns on.
  • Page 97 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] 2. Retentive type When the drive input X001 of the timer coil T250 turns ON, the current Set value X001 value counter for T250 adds and counts clock pulses of 100 ms. T250 (constant) K345...

  • Page 98: Set Value Specification Method

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] 4.5.3 Set value specification method 1. Specifying a constant (K) T10 is a 100 ms (0.1 sec) type timer. Constant When the constant "100" is specified, T10 works as a 10- X003 (decimal integer) second timer (0.1 sec ×...

  • Page 99: Program Examples [Off-Delay Timer And Flicker Timer]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] 4.5.6 Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer] Off-delay timer X001 Y000 X001 Y000 X001 (20 sec) Y000 K200 Flicker timer (blink) X001 X001 Y000...

  • Page 100: Handling Timers As Numeric Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T] 4.5.7 Handling timers as numeric devices In timers, the output contact operating in accordance with the set value is used in some cases, and the present value is used as numeric data for control in other cases.

  • Page 101: Counter [C]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] Counter [C] 4.6.1 Numbers of counters The table below shows counter (C) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) → For high-speed counters, refer to Section 4.7. 1.

  • Page 102: Functions And Operation Examples

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 4.6.4 Functions and operation examples 1. General type and latched (battery backed) type 16-bit up counters • The valid set range of 16-bit binary up counter is from K1 to K32767 (decimal constant). K0 provides the same operation as K1, and the output contact turns on at the first counting.

  • Page 103: Set Value Specification Method

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] • The current value increases or decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. When a counter executes up-counting from "+2,147,483,647", the counter value becomes "−2,147,483,648". In the same way, when a counter executes down-counting from "−2,147,483,648", the counter value becomes "+2,147,483,647".

  • Page 104: Handling Counters As Numeric Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C] 4.6.7 Handling counters as numeric devices Counters use output contacts operating in accordance with the set value or use the counter value (current value) as numeric data for control.

  • Page 105: High-Speed Counter [C] (Fx3U/Fx3Uc Plc)

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) High-Speed Counter [C] (FX PLC) High-speed counter only available in DC input type main units. 4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters 1.
  • Page 106 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 5. High-speed counter device list External reset External start Classification Counter No. Edge count Data length input terminal input terminal C235 C236 C237...

  • Page 107: Input Assignment For High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number. When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically changes (X000 to X005: 5 μs, X006 and X007: 50 μs).

  • Page 108: Handling Of High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) Restriction to overlap input numbers • Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high-speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT instructions and general-purpose inputs.
  • Page 109 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) • When the reset input X011 turns ON and RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter is reset to "0" and the output contact is restored.

  • Page 110: Current Value Update Timing And Comparison Of Current Value

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) • A 2-phase encoder generates outputs for the A phase and B phase by a phase difference of 90°. With these outputs, a high-speed counter automatically executes up-count and down-count as shown in the figure below.

  • Page 111: Related Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.5 Related devices 1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters Type Counter No. Specifying device Up-counting Down-counting...

  • Page 112: Changing The Logic Of External Reset Input Signal

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.6 Changing the logic of external reset input signal The counters C241 to C245, C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 are usually reset when the external reset input turns By using the program shown below, the logic can be inverted so that these counters are reset when the external reset input turns OFF.

  • Page 113: How To Use 2-Phase 2-Count Input Counters C251 To C255 With 4 Edge Counting

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.8 How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with 4 edge counting For the 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255, the edge count is usually set to 1. By using the programs shown in the table below, the edge count may be set to 4.

  • Page 114: Conditions For Hardware Counters To Be Handled As Software Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.9 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters High-speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters. In some conditions, however, hardware counters are handled as software counters.

  • Page 115: Response Frequency Of High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.10 Response frequency of high-speed counters 1. Response frequency of hardware counters The table below shows the maximum response frequency of hardware counters. When hardware counters are handled as software counters in some operating conditions, their maximum response frequency becomes equivalent to that of software counters, and thus hardware counters are some times subject to restrictions in total frequency.
  • Page 116 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) When special analog adapters and FX Series special function blocks/units are used Counter type Response frequency and total frequency according to instruction use condition When HSZ and HSCT Magnifica- When only HSCT...

  • Page 117: Cautions On Use

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) 4.7.11 Cautions on use • For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed counting.
  • Page 118 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC) • Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high-speed counter (and does not turn OFF the contact)".

  • Page 119: High-Speed Counter [C] (Fx 3G Plcs)

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) High-Speed Counter [C] (FX PLCs) 4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high-speed counters 1. Types of high-speed counters The main unit has built-in 32-bit high-speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2- count).
  • Page 120 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 5. High-speed counter device list External reset External start Classification Counter No. Data length input terminal input terminal C235 C236 C237 Not provided...

  • Page 121: Input Assignment For High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 4.8.2 Input assignment for high-speed counters Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high-speed counter number. When a high-speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit automatically changes (X000, X001, X003 and X004: 10 μs, X002, X005, X006 and X007: 50 μs).

  • Page 122: Handling Of High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 4.8.3 Handling of high-speed counters High-speed counters in FX PLCs operate in the same way as high-speed counters in FX PLCs.

  • Page 123: Assignment Of Counter Input Terminal And Switching Of Function

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 2. Devices used to check the counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input counters and 2-phase 2-count input counters Type Counter No.

  • Page 124: Response Frequency Of High-Speed Counters

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 4.8.7 Response frequency of high-speed counters 1. Response frequency and overall frequency When any of the following functions/instructions is used, the overall frequency is restricted regardless of the operand of the instruction.

  • Page 125: Cautions On Use

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) 4.8.8 Cautions on use • For a contact to drive the coil of a high-speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high-speed counting.
  • Page 126 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High-Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs) • Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high-speed counter (and does not turn OFF the contact)".

  • Page 127: Data Register And File Register [D]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] Data Register and File Register [D] Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. File registers are handled as the initial values of data registers. Each data register or file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).

  • Page 128: Structures Of Data Registers And File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 4.9.2 Structures of data registers and file registers 16-bit type One (16-bit) data register or file register can store a numeric value ranging from -32,768 to +32,767. D 0 (16 bits) High order...

  • Page 129: Functions And Operation Examples Of Data Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 4.9.3 Functions and operation examples of data registers Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. Each data register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two data registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
  • Page 130 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 3. Operation examples Data registers can be used in various control with numeric data. This section explains the operations of representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various applications.

  • Page 131: Functions And Operation Examples Of File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 4.9.4 Functions and operation examples of file registers A file register is a device for setting the initial value of a data register with the same number. Each file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).
  • Page 132 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 2. File register ↔ Data register <updating the same number registers by BMOV (FNC 15) instruction> When the same file register is specified for both in BOMV (FNC 15) instruction, this instruction specifies the same-number register update mode and executes the following operation: Read...
  • Page 133 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] 3. Data register → File register <writing by BMOV (FNC 15) instruction> When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the destination of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, it is possible to directly write data to the file register area [A] inside the program memory.

  • Page 134: Cautions On Using File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] When file registers of different device numbers are specified for the source and destination Write Inside built-in Inside system M8024 memory or memory cassette...

  • Page 135: Extension Register [R] And Extension File Register [Er]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Extension registers (R) are the extended form of data registers (D). The contents of extension registers (R) can be stored in extension file registers (ER).

  • Page 136: Structures Of Extension Registers And Extension File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10.3 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers One extension register consists of 16 bits. Extension registers can be used in 16-bit and 32-bit applied instructions in the same way as data registers.

  • Page 137: Functions And Operation Examples Of Extension Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10.5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers Extension registers can be used in various controls with numeric data the same as data registers. This subsection explains operations in representative basic instructions and applied instructions among various applications.

  • Page 138: Functions And Operation Examples Of Extension File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10.6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers Extension file registers (ER) are usually used as log data storage destinations and set data storage destinations. Extension file registers can be handled only with dedicated instructions shown in the table below.
  • Page 139 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 1. Relationship between extension file registers and extension registers Extension file registers and extension registers have the following positional relationship inside the PLC. a) FX PLCs Extension register (R)
  • Page 140 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 2. Sectors of extension registers and extension file registers In FX PLCs, extension registers and extension file registers are divided into sectors in the data configuration. One sector consists of 2,048 devices.

  • Page 141: Cautions On Using Extension File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10.7 Cautions on using extension file registers 1. Cautions on writing data to extension file registers (FX PLC) Because extension file registers are stored in the flash memory inside a memory cassette, pay attention to the following points:...

  • Page 142: Registration Of Data In Extension Registers And Extension File Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 4.10.8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A or later). →...
  • Page 143 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Setting the data 1. Right-click [Device memory] in the project data list to open the submenu. 2.
  • Page 144 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] 5. Input a device number to be set to "Device Label", and click the [Display] button. 6.
  • Page 145 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] Writing (transferring) data to the PLC 1. Select [Online] → [Write to PLC...] to open the [Write to PLC] dialog box. FX3U(C)*1 For Ver.

  • Page 146: Index Register [V And Z]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 Index Register [V and Z] 4.11 Index Register [V and Z] Index registers can be used in the same way as of data registers. But they are special registers since they can change the contents of device numbers and numeric values by program when combined with another device number or numeric value in operands of applied instructions.

  • Page 147: Indexing Of Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 Index Register [V and Z] 4.11.3 Indexing of devices Available devices and the contents of indexing are as described below: → For indexing method and cautions, refer to Section 5.7. Decimal devices/numeric values: M, S, T, C, D, R, KnM, KnS, P and K For example, when "V0 = K5"...

  • Page 148: Pointer [P And I]

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] 4.12 Pointer [P and I] 4.12.1 Numbers of pointers The table below shows numbers of pointers (P and I). (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) When using a pointer for input interrupt, an input number assigned to it cannot be used together with a "high-speed counter"...

  • Page 149: Functions And Operation Examples Of Pointers For Interrupt

    Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] 4.12.3 Functions and operation examples of pointers for interrupt → For details on interrupt function, refer to Chapter 36. There are three types of pointers for interrupt. When in use, they are combined with IRET(FNC03), EI(FNC04) and DI(FNC05) for interrupt return, enabling interrupt and disabling interrupt.
  • Page 150 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] Operations • Interrupt is usually disabled in the PLC. FNC 04 If interrupt is enabled by EI instruction, when X000 or X001 turns ON while a program is scanned, the PLC executes the interrupt Interrupt enabled routine [1] or [2], and then returns to the main...
  • Page 151 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] Operations • Timer interrupt is enabled after EI instruction. Step FNC 04 Interrupt is It is not necessary to program DI (disable enabled interrupt) instruction when no zone to disable timer interrupt is needed.
  • Page 152 Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I] Operations Step • Enable interrupt after EI instruction, and FNC 04 describe the main program. M8000 • Drive the coil of a high-speed counter, and C255 K2,147,483,647 specify an interrupt pointer in DHSCS (FNC 53)

  • Page 153: How To Specify Devices And Constants To Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions This chapter explains how to specify sources and destinations in sequence instructions which are the basis for handling PLC instructions.

  • Page 154: Conversion Of Numeric Values

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) 5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values Numeric values handled in FX PLCs can be converted as shown in the table below: Hexadecimal number Decimal number (DEC) Octal number (OCT)

  • Page 155: Handling Of Numeric Values In Floating Point Operations

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) 5.1.3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations Handling of numeric values in floating point operations Binary integers are handled inside PLCs.
  • Page 156 Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers) Scientific notation (real number) Because binary floating point (real number) is difficult to understand for users, it can be converted into scientific notation (real number).

  • Page 157: Specification Of Constants K, H And E (Decimal, Hexadecimal And Real Number)

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number) Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number) When handling constants in a sequence program, use constant K (decimal), H (hexadecimal) or E (floating point).

  • Page 158: Character Strings

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.3 Character Strings Character Strings Character strings are classified into character string constants which directly specify character strings in operands in applied instructions and character string data.

  • Page 159: Specification Of Digits For Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***) Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***) Handling of bit devices Devices which handle only the ON/OFF information such as X, Y, M and S are called bit devices.

  • Page 160: Bit Specification Of A Word Device (D[ ].B)

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) By specifying a bit of a word device, the specified bit can be used as bit data. When specifying a bit of a word device, use a word device number and bit number (hexadecimal).

  • Page 161: Indexing

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing Indexing The functions and structures of index registers are explained in detail in "4.11 Index Register [V and Z]". Refer to Section 4.11 in advance.

  • Page 162: Indexing In Applied Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing 5.7.2 Indexing in applied instructions Expression of applied instructions allowing indexing In the explanation of applied instructions, " " is added to the source or destination symbol to indicate operands allowing indexing as shown in the figure below so that such operands can be discriminated from operands...
  • Page 163 Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing Cautions When even if a numeric value written to index registers does not exceed the 16-bit numeric value range (0 to 32767), make sure to overwrite both V and Z using a 32-bit instruction.

  • Page 164: Indexing Example For Instruction With Limited Number Of Use

    Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing 5.7.3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use. By modifying the target device numbers using index registers V and Z, the target device numbers can be changed using the program.

  • Page 165: What To Understand Before Programming

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions What to Understand before Programming This chapter explains the I/O processing, relationship among instructions and programming method which should be understood before creating sequence programs.
  • Page 166 Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions Outline 1. Instruction format The applied instruction number (FNC No.) and instruction mnemonic are indicated. The table below shows the meaning of simplified expression.
  • Page 167 Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions Applicable devices Devices which can be specified in operands of instructions are shown. When a device supports an instruction, " " is added to the device. 1) Bit devices 2) Word devices •X : Input relay (X)

  • Page 168: Cautions On Creation Of Fundamental Programs

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs This section explains cautions on programming. 6.2.1 Programming procedure and execution order 1.

  • Page 169: Double Output (Double Coil) Operation And Countermeasures

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs 6.2.2 Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures 1. Operation of double outputs When a coil gives double outputs (double coils) in a sequence program, the priority is given to the latter one. Suppose that the same coil Y003 is used in two positions as shown in the figure on the right.

  • Page 170: Circuits Which Cannot Be Programmed And Countermeasures

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs 6.2.3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures 1. Bridge circuit A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right (so that a circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel).

  • Page 171: I/O Processing And Response Delay

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay I/O Processing and Response Delay 1. Operation timing of I/O relays and response delay FX PLCs execute the I/O processing by repeating the The ON/OFF status of input [Input process (1) to process (3).

  • Page 172: Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions The table below shows the mutual relationship among various program flow control instructions. In the table below, "...
  • Page 173 Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions :This combination can be used without any problem. × :This combination is not allowed; Operation error will be occurs. :This combination is allowed, but is better not to be used because the operation will be complicated.

  • Page 174: General Rules For Applied Instructions

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions Instructions and operands - Both a function number FNC 00 to FNC and a symbol (mnemonic) indicating the contents are given to each applied instruction.
  • Page 175 Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions Instruction form and operation type Applied instructions are classified into "16-bit type" or "32-bit type" by the size of handled numeric values. And by the operation type, applied instructions are classified into "continuous operation type"...

  • Page 176: Handling Of General Flags

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5.2 Handling of general flags In some types of applied instructions, the following flags operate: Examples: M8020: Zero flag M8021: Borrow flag M8022: Carry flag M8029: Instruction execution complete flag...
  • Page 177 Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 2. Introduction of method for using flags in any positions other than directly under applied instructions When two or more applied instructions are programmed, general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied instruction turns ON.

  • Page 178: Handling Of Operation Error Flag

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5.3 Handling of operation error flag When there is an error in the applied instruction configuration, target device or target device number range and an error occurs while operation is executed, the following flag turns ON and the error information is stored.

  • Page 179: Limitation In The Number Of Instructions And Limitation In Simultaneous Instruction Instances

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions 6.5.5 Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous instruction instances Limitation in the number of instructions Some applied instructions can only be used up to the specified number of times.

  • Page 180: Symbolic Information Storage And Block Password

    Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.6 Symbolic information storage and block password Symbolic information storage and block password 6.6.1 Storage of symbolic information The FX PLC Ver. 3.00 or later can store symbolic information (data indicating the program configuration such as structure and labels).

  • Page 181: Basic Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Basic Instruction This chapter explains types and functions of basic sequence instructions. For beginners to sequence control, we offer "Introduction Course" and "Relay Ladder Course" learning texts for reference.
  • Page 182 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference Connection Instruction Serial connection of multiple − AND Block Section 7.7 parallel circuits Parallel connection of − OR Block Section 7.6 multiple contact circuits Memory Point...

  • Page 183: Ld, Ldi

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI LD, LDI Outline LD and LDI instructions are contacts connected to bus lines. When combined with ANB instruction described later, LD and LDI instructions can be used for the start of branches. 1.
  • Page 184 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI 2. LDI instruction (initial logical operation, NC contact type) Circuit program List program LDIinstruction Connection to bus line X000 0000 X000 0001 Y000 Y000 Bus line Timing chart...

  • Page 185: Out

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT Outline OUT instruction drives coils of output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state relays (S), timers (T) and counters (C). 1. Instruction format Mnemonic Operation Condition Basic Instruction Continuous...
  • Page 186 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT Timing chart X000 OUT instruction Y000 X001 OUT instruction M100 OUT instruction M101 2. When a timer or counter is used The set value is required after OUT instruction for the counting coil of a timer or counter. The set value can be specified directly by a decimal number (K) or indirectly using a data register (D) or extension register (R).
  • Page 187 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT 3. Indexing Devices used in OUT instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z). (State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D .b" cannot be indexed.) The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are Circuit program List program...

  • Page 188: And, Ani

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI AND, ANI Outline AND and ANI instructions connect one contact in series. The number of contacts connected in series is not limited, so AND and ANI instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
  • Page 189 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI 2. ANI instruction (serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts) Circuit program List program ANI instruction 0000 X002 X002 X000 Contact connected 0001 X000 Y003 in series...
  • Page 190 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI Program examples Circuit program List program AND instruction 0000 X000 X001 X000 Contact connected 0001 X001 Y003 in series 0002 Y003 0003 X002 ANI instruction Contact connected 0004...

  • Page 191: Or, Ori

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI OR, ORI Outline OR and ORI instructions are used to connect one contact in parallel. If two or more contacts are connected in series, use ORB instruction described later to connect such a serial circuit block to another circuit in parallel.
  • Page 192 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI 2. ORI instruction (parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts) Circuit program List program X000 0000 X000 0001 X002 Y001 0002 Y001 X002 Timing chart LD instruction X000...
  • Page 193 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI 5. Bit specification of data register (D) A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OR and ORI instructions. When specifying a bit in data register, input "."...

  • Page 194: Ldp, Ldf, Andp, Andf, Orp, Orf

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF Outline LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions for contacts detect the rising edge, and become active during one operation cycle only at the rising edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns from OFF to ON).
  • Page 195 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF Explanation of function and operation 1. LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions (initial logical operation of rising edge pulse, serial connection of rising edge pulse, and parallel connection of rising edge pulse) Circuit program List program...
  • Page 196 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 2. LDF, ANDF, and ORF instructions (initial logical operation of falling/trailing edge pulse, serial connection of falling/trailing edge pulse, and parallel connection of falling/trailing edge pulse) Circuit program List program LDF instruction...
  • Page 197 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 4. Output drive side The following two circuits offer the same operation: <OUT instruction> <Pulse instruction> X010 X010 X010 Operation Operation cycle...
  • Page 198 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF 5. Differences in the operation caused by auxiliary relay (M) numbers When an auxiliary relay (M) is specified as a device in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions, the operation varies depending on the device number range as shown in the figure below.
  • Page 199 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF Cautions 1. Cautions when the LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, or ORF instruction programmed in the same step is executed two or more times within one operation cycle When LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP or ORF instruction programmed in the same step is executed two or more times within one operation cycle, the following operation results: Programs executed two or more times...

  • Page 200: Orb

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.6 ORB Outline A circuit in which two or more contacts are connected in series is called serial circuit block. 1. Instruction format Mnemonic Operation Condition Basic Instruction Continuous Operation...

  • Page 201: Anb

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.7 ANB Outline Use ANB instruction to connect a branch circuit (parallel circuit block) to the preceding circuit in series. Use LD or LDI instruction at the start of branch. After completing a parallel circuit block, connect the parallel circuit block to the preceding circuit in series by ANB instruction.

  • Page 202: Mps, Mrd, Mpp

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP MPS, MRD, MPP Outline and FX PLCs have 11 memories called "Stack" which store the intermediate result (ON or OFF) of operations. 1.
  • Page 203 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP Error MPS instruction can be used two or more times. However, the difference between number of MPS instructions and the number of MPP instructions should be 11 or less, and should be 0 at the end.
  • Page 204 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP Program examples Program example 1: One stack Only one stack is used in this example. Circuit program List program X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000 Y000...
  • Page 205 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP Program example 3: Two stacks Circuit program List program X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000 Y000 0001 0002 AND X001 X003 0003 Y001 0004 AND X002 0005 OUT Y000...

  • Page 206: Mc, Mcr

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR MC, MCR Outline When MC instruction is executed, the bus line (LD or LDI point) is moved to a position after MC contact. The bus line can be returned to the original position by MCR instruction.
  • Page 207 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR Caution 1. A circuit error (Error code: 6611) occurs when an instruction connected the bus line (such as LD and LDI) is not present just after the MC instruction. 2.
  • Page 208 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR When the nesting structure is adopted When using MC instructions inside MC instruction, increase the nest level "N" in turn in the way "N0 → N1 → N2 →...

  • Page 209: Inv

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.10 INV 7.10 Outline 1. Instruction Format INV instruction inverts the operation result up to just before INV instruction, and does not require device number specification. Mnemonic Operation Condition Basic Instruction...

  • Page 210: Mep, Mef

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF 7.11 MEP, MEF Outline MEP and MEF commands are instructions that change the operation results to pulses so that device numbers do not have to be specified.
  • Page 211 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF Caution 1. MEP and MEF instructions may not operate normally if the indexed contact is modified and changed to pulses by sub-routine programs, the FOR and NEXT instructions, etc. 2.

  • Page 212: Pls, Plf

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF 7.12 PLS, PLF Outline When PLS instruction is executed, an applicable device is activated during only one operation cycle after a drive input turns ON.
  • Page 213 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF 3. Output drive side The following two circuits result the same operation. <OUT instruction> <PLS instruction> X000 X000 X000 X000 ON during one operation cycle In each case, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.
  • Page 214 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF 3. Caution for simultaneous instances of the ZRST instruction and the PLS instruction The ZRST instruction resets the last stage for the PLS instruction and PLF instruction of the applicable device. In addition, the reset state of T and C is also reset.

  • Page 215: Set, Rst

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST 7.13 SET, RST Outline Setting a bit device (SET instruction (set bit device latch ON)) When the command input turns ON, SET instruction sets to ON an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification (D .b) of word device.
  • Page 216 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST Explanation of function and operation SET instruction drives the coil for an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification of data register (D).
  • Page 217 Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST Cautions on using RST instruction for a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed in a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program, the timer or counter may be kept in the reset status and the timer or counter may be disabled.

  • Page 218: Nop

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.14 NOP 7.14 Outline NOP instruction specifies no operation. When a program is erased completely, all steps are replaced with NOP instructions. When NOP instruction is located between general instructions, PLCs ignore NOP instruction. If NOP instructions are put in the middle of a program, fluctuation of step numbers is minimized when the program is changed or added.

  • Page 219: End

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.15 END 7.15 Outline END instruction specifies the end of a program. (Do not write the END instruction in the middle of a program.) 1. Instruction format Mnemonic Operation Condition Basic Instruction...

  • Page 220: Number Of Instruction Steps And Specified Devices

    Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices 7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices The table below shows the number of steps of basic instructions. Available devices and device ranges vary depending on the PLC.

  • Page 221: Program Flow – Fnc 00 To Fnc 09

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 FNC 00 to FNC 09 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as conditional program execution and priority processing.

  • Page 222: Fnc 00 - Cj / Conditional Jump

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Outline CJ or CJP instruction jumps to a pointer (P); The sequence program steps between CJ or CJP instruction and the pointer are not executed.
  • Page 223 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Cautions 1. Relationship between the label input position and the list program The figure below shows programming of a label.
  • Page 224 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 5. Label unnecessary for the pointer P63 The pointer P63 specifies jump to END step. Do not program P63. If P63 is programmed, PLCs will display the error code 6507 (defective label definition) and stop.
  • Page 225 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump Program example 1. When a jump is necessary after OFF processing In one operation cycle after X023 changes from OFF to ON, the CJ P7 instruction becomes valid. By using this method, jump can be executed after all outputs between the CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 turn OFF.

  • Page 226: Cj Instruction And Operations Of Contact And Coil

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil In the program example shown below, when X000 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction in the first circuit to the label P8.
  • Page 227 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 2. Circuit example 2 for explaining operations (when only an RST instruction for a timer or counter is jumped) When X011 turns ON while the RST instruction for the X012...

  • Page 228: Relationship Between Master Control Instruction And Jump Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump 8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction The figure below shows the contents of operation and the relationship between the master control instruction. Avoid using [2], [4] and [5] because the operation will be complicated.

  • Page 229: Fnc 01 - Call / Call Subroutine

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine Outline This instruction calls and executes a program which should be processed commonly in a sequence program. This instruction reduces the number of program steps, and achieves efficient program design.
  • Page 230 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine Caution 1. Using a label (P) number two or more times In CALL instructions, the same number can be used two or more times in operands (P). However, do not use a label (P) and number used in another instruction (CJ instruction).

  • Page 231: Cautions On Subroutines And Interrupt Routines

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine 8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines This section explains cautions on creating programs in subroutines and interrupt routines. The explanation below is given for subroutines, but the situation also applies to interrupt routines.
  • Page 232 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine Example for resetting held outputs (countermeasures) Program example X000 FNC 01 CALLP X001 X002 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing.

  • Page 233: Fnc 02 - Sret / Subroutine Return

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return Outline This instruction returns the program execution from a subroutine to the main program. 1.

  • Page 234: Fnc 03 - Iret / Interrupt Return

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return Outline This instruction returns the program execution from an interrupt routine to the main program. 1.
  • Page 235 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return Program example Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs. FNC 04 Use EI instruction to enable interrupts. When X000 turns ON while the main program is executed, M8000 instructions after the interrupt routine pointer I001 are...

  • Page 236: Fnc 04 - Ei / Enable Interrupt

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt Outline Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs. This instruction enables interrupts in PLCs.

  • Page 237: Fnc 05 - Di / Disable Interrupt

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt Outline This instruction disables interrupts after interrupts were enabled by EI (FNC 04) instruction. 1.

  • Page 238: Fnc 06 - Main Routine Program End

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End Outline This instruction indicates the end of the main program. 1.
  • Page 239 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End 2. In the case of CALL instruction Main routine program X011 FNC 01 P 21 CALL Main routine...

  • Page 240: Fnc 07 - Wdt / Watchdog Timer Refresh

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh Outline This instruction refreshes the watchdog timer in a sequence program. 1.
  • Page 241 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh 2. The watchdog timer time can be changed. → For details on changing watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 37.2.2. By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time (initial value: 200 ms) can be changed.

  • Page 242: Fnc 08 - For / Start A For/Next Loop

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop Outline FOR instruction specifies the number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT (FNC 09) instructions.

  • Page 243: Fnc 09 - Next / End A For/Next Loop

    Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop Outline NEXT instruction specifies the end position of the loop.
  • Page 244 Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop Errors 1. Watchdog timer error When FOR-NEXT loop is repeated many times, the operation cycle (D8010) is too long, and a watchdog timer error may occur.

  • Page 245: Move And Compare – Fnc 10 To Fnc 19

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 FNC 10 to FNC 19 provide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data comparison which are regarded as most important in applied instructions.

  • Page 246: Fnc 10 - Cmp / Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare FNC 10 – CMP / Compare Outline This instruction compares two values, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or larger) to bit devices (3 points). →...
  • Page 247 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare 2. 32-bit operation (DCMP and DCMPP) The comparison value [ ] and the comparison source [ ] are compared with each other.

  • Page 248: Fnc 11 - Zcp / Zone Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares two values (zone) with the comparison source, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or larger) to bit devices (3 points).
  • Page 249 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare 2. 32-bit operation (DZCP and DZCPP) The lower comparison value [ ] and upper comparison value [ ] are compared with the comparison source [...

  • Page 250: Fnc 12 - Mov / Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move FNC 12 – MOV / Move Outline This instruction transfers (copies) the contents of a device to another device. 1.
  • Page 251 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move When a word device is specified The word device transfers 1 point. Command input FNC 12...
  • Page 252 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move Program examples 1. When reading the current value of a timer and counter X001 (Current value of T0) →...

  • Page 253: Fnc 13 - Smov / Shift Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move Outline This instruction distributes and composes data in units of digit (4 bits). 1.
  • Page 254 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SMOV and SMOVP) The contents of the transfer source and transfer destination are converted into 4-digit BCD (0000 to...

  • Page 255: Fnc 14 - Cml / Complement

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement FNC 14 – CML / Complement Outline This instruction inverts data in units of bit, and then transfers (copies) the inverted data. 1.
  • Page 256 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement 2. 32-bit operation (DCML and DCMLP) Each bit of devices specified as [ ] is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred to •...

  • Page 257: Fnc 15 - Bmov / Block Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move Outline This instruction transfers (copies) a specified number of data all at once. 1.
  • Page 258 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move Extension function (bi-directional transfer function) By controlling the direction inverse flag M8024 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be transferred in two directions in one program.

  • Page 259: Function Of Transfer Between File Registers And Data Registers

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move 9.6.1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers BMOV (FNC 15) instruction has a special function for file registers (D1000 and later). →...
  • Page 260 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move Handling of the memory cassette When changing the contents of file registers secured inside the memory cassette, confirm the following conditions: - Set the protect switch of the memory cassette to OFF.

  • Page 261: Fnc 16 - Fmov / Fill Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move Outline This instruction transfers same data to specified number of devices. 1.
  • Page 262 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move 2. 32-bit operation (DFMOV and DFMOVP) The contents of [ ] are transferred to "n" 32-bit devices starting from [ •...

  • Page 263: Fnc 17 - Xch / Exchange

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange Outline This instruction exchanges data between two devices. 1.
  • Page 264 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange Extension function (function compatible between the FX Series and the FX Series) When the instruction is executed while M8160 is ON, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of a word device are exchanged with each other.

  • Page 265: Fnc 18 - Bcd / Conversion To Binary Coded Decimal

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Outline This instruction converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data.
  • Page 266 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 2. 32-bit operation (DBCD and DBCDP) This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of [ ] into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, and transfers the converted BCD data to [ •...
  • Page 267 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Program examples 1. When the seven-segment display unit has 1 digit X000 FNC 18 K1Y000...

  • Page 268: Fnc 19 - Bin / Conversion To Binary

    Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary Outline This instruction converts binary-coded decimal (BCD) data into binary (BIN) data.
  • Page 269 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary 2. 32-bit operation (DBIN and DBINP) This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of [ ] into binary (BIN) data, and transfers the converted binary data to [ •...
  • Page 270 Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary Program examples 1. When the digital switch has 1 digit X000 FNC 19 K1X000...

  • Page 271: Arithmetic And Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – Fnc 20 To Fnc 29

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 FNC 20 to FNC 29 provide instructions for arithmetic operations and logical operations of numeric data.

  • Page 272: Fnc 20 - Add / Addition

    Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Outline This instruction executes addition by two values to obtain the result (A + B = C).
  • Page 273 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Related devices 1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value →...
  • Page 274 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition Program example 1. Difference between ADD instruction and INC instruction caused by a program for adding "+1" When ADD[P] is executed, "1"...

  • Page 275: Fnc 21 - Sub / Subtraction

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Outline This instruction executes subtraction using two values to obtain the result (A −...
  • Page 276 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Related devices 1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric value →...
  • Page 277 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction Program example 1. Difference between the SUB instruction and the DEC instruction used by a program for subtracting "1"...

  • Page 278: Fnc 22 - Mul / Multiplication

    Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication Outline This instruction executes multiplication by two values to obtain the result (A x B = C).
  • Page 279 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication • When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ A digit can be specified ranging from K1 to K8.
  • Page 280 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication Cautions 1. Devices specified in • In a 32-bit operation (by DMUL or DMULP), Z cannot be specified in 2.

  • Page 281: Fnc 23 - Div / Division

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division Outline This instruction executes division by two values to obtain the result (A ÷...
  • Page 282 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division 2. 32-bit operation (DDIV and DDIVP) ] indicates the dividend, [ ] indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to ]), and the remainder is transferred to [ +2].
  • Page 283 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division Program examples 1. 16-bit operation X000 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder...

  • Page 284: Fnc 24 - Inc / Increment

    Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment Outline This instruction increments the data of a specified device by "1".
  • Page 285 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment Program example X010 FNC 12 0 → (Z) Z is cleared by the reset input X010.

  • Page 286: Fnc 25 - Dec / Decrement

    Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement 10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement Outline This instruction decrements the data of a specified device by "1".

  • Page 287: Fnc 26 - Wand / Logical Word And

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND Outline This instruction executes the logical product (AND) operation of two numeric values.
  • Page 288 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND 2. 32-bit operation (DAND and DANDP) The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of [ ] and [ ] in units of...

  • Page 289: Fnc 27 - Wor / Logical Word Or

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR Outline This instruction executes the logical sum (OR) operation of two numeric values.
  • Page 290 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR 2. 32-bit operation (DOR and DORP) The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of [ ] and [ ] in units of bit,...

  • Page 291: Fnc 28 - Wxor / Logical Exclusive Or

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR Outline This instruction executes the exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation of two numeric values.
  • Page 292 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR 2. 32-bit operation (DXOR and DXORP) The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of [ ] and [ ] in...

  • Page 293: 10.10 Fnc 29 - Neg / Negation

    10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation Outline This instruction obtains the complement of a numeric value (by inverting each bit and adding "1").
  • Page 294 Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation Program examples The program examples below are provided to obtain the absolute value of a negative binary value. 1.

  • Page 295: Rotation And Shift Operation – Fnc 30 To Fnc 39

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 FNC 30 to FNC 39 provide instructions for rotating and shifting bit data and word data in specified directions. FNC No.

  • Page 296: Fnc 30 - Ror / Rotation Right

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag. 1.
  • Page 297 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right 2. 32-bit operation (DROR and DRORP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ ] are rotated rightward.

  • Page 298: Fnc 31 - Rol / Rotation Left

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits without the carry flag. 1.
  • Page 299 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left 2. 32-bit operation (DROL and DROLP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ ] are rotated leftward.

  • Page 300: Fnc 32 - Rcr / Rotation Right With Carry

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits together with the carry flag.
  • Page 301 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry 2. 32-bit operation (DRCR and DRCRP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.

  • Page 302: Fnc 33 - Rcl / Rotation Left With Carry

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry Outline This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits together with the carry flag.
  • Page 303 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry 2. 32-bit operation (DRCL and DRCLP) "n" bits out of 32 bits of [ ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward.

  • Page 304: Fnc 34 - Sftr / Bit Shift Right

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right Outline This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length rightward by the specified number of bits.
  • Page 305 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SFTR and SFTRP) For "n1"...

  • Page 306: Fnc 35 - Sftl / Bit Shift Left

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left Outline This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length leftward by the specified number of bits.
  • Page 307 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left Caution Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns from OFF to ON in the SFTLP instruction, but that "n2"...

  • Page 308: Replacement Of Sft Instruction In F

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left 11.6.1 Replacement of SFT instruction in F and F Series SFT instruction in F PLCs corresponds to SFTL (FNC 35) instruction in FX...

  • Page 309: Fnc 36 - Wsfr / Word Shift Right

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right Outline This instruction shifts word devices with "n1"...
  • Page 310 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right Caution Note that "n2" words are shifted when the drive input turns ON in the WSFRP instruction, but that "n2" words are shifted in each operation cycle in the WSFR instruction.

  • Page 311: Fnc 37 - Wsfl / Word Shift Left

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left Outline This instruction shifts the word data information leftward by the specified number of words.
  • Page 312 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left n2 (in the case of "n2=3") Before execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9") "n2"...

  • Page 313: Fnc 38 - Sfwr / Shift Write [Fifo/Filo Control]

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] Outline This instruction writes data for first-in first-out (FIFO) and last-in first-out (LIFO) control.
  • Page 314 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SFWR and SFWRP) The contents of are written to "n-1"...
  • Page 315 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] Program example 1. Example of first-in first-out control →...

  • Page 316: Fnc 39 - Sfrd / Shift Read [Fifo Control]

    Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] Outline This instruction reads data for first-in first-out control.
  • Page 317 Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] Before execution S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 Pointer Executed at the 1st time −...

  • Page 318: Data Operation – Fnc 40 To Fnc 49

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 FNC 40 to FNC 49 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions FNC 10 to FNC 39 and for executing special processing.

  • Page 319: Fnc 40 - Zrst / Zone Reset

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset Outline This instruction resets devices located in a zone between two specified devices at one time. Use this instruction for restarting operation from the beginning after pause or after resetting control data.
  • Page 320 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset When are word devices "K0" is written to the entire range from at one time.
  • Page 321 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset 2. When specifying high-speed counters (C235 to C255) The ZRST instruction is handled as the 16-bit type, but 32-bit counters can be specified in However, it is not possible to specify a 16-bit counter in and specify a 32-bit counter in should be the same type.

  • Page 322: Fnc 41 - Deco / Decode

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode Outline This instruction converts numeric data into ON bit. A bit number which is set to ON by this instruction indicates a numeric value.
  • Page 323 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) When The numeric value (expressed in 2 on the low-order side) of is decoded to -When all bits of...
  • Page 324 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode Program example 1. When setting bit devices to ON according to the value of a data register The value of D0 (whose current value is "14"...

  • Page 325: Fnc 42 - Enco / Encode

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode Outline This instruction obtains positions in which bits are ON in data. 1.
  • Page 326 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) When " bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) from a device specified in ON bit positions among "2 are encoded to -The encoding result of...

  • Page 327: Fnc 43 - Sum / Sum Of Active Bits

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits Outline This instruction counts the number of "1"...
  • Page 328 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits 2. 32-bit operation (DSUM and DSUMP) The number of bits in the ON status in [ ] is counted, and stored to •...
  • Page 329 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits Caution While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed. The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status.

  • Page 330: Fnc 44 - Bon / Check Specified Bit Status

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status Outline This instruction checks whether a specified bit position in a specified device is ON or OFF.
  • Page 331 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status 2. 32-bit operation (DBON and DBONP) The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in [ ] is output to [When the bit "n"...

  • Page 332: Fnc 45 - Mean / Mean

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean Outline This instruction obtains the mean value of data. 1.
  • Page 333 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean Caution • When a device number is exceeded, "n" is handled as a smaller value in the possible range. •...

  • Page 334: Fnc 46 - Ans / Timed Annunciator Set

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set Outline This instruction sets a state relay as an annunciator (S900 to S999). 1.
  • Page 335 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set Program example 1. Displaying a fault number using an annunciator When the program for external fault diagnosis shown below is created and the content of D8049 (smallest state relay number in the ON status) is monitored, the smallest state relay number in the ON status from S900 to S999 is displayed.

  • Page 336: Fnc 47 - Anr / Annunciator Reset

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset Outline This instruction resets an annuciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status with the smallest number. 1.

  • Page 337: Fnc 48 - Sqr / Square Root

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root Outline This instruction obtains the square root. The ESQR (FNC127) instruction obtains the square root in floating point operation.

  • Page 338: 12.10 Fnc 49 - Flt / Conversion To Floating Point

    Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point Outline This instruction converts a binary integer into a binary floating point (real number).
  • Page 339 Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point Program example 1. Arithmetic operations by binary floating point operations The sequence program shown below is constructed as follows: Calculation example ×...

  • Page 340: High-Speed Processing – Fnc 50 To Fnc 59

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13. High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 FNC 50 to FNC 59 provide interrupt processing type high-speed instructions that execute sequence control using the latest I/O information and utilize the high-speed processing performance of the PLC.

  • Page 341: Fnc 50 - Ref / Refresh

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh Outline This instruction immediately outputs the latest input (X) information or the current output (Y) operation result in the middle of a sequence program.
  • Page 342 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (REF and REFP) When refreshing outputs (Y) "n"...
  • Page 343 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh Does not turn ON. Input terminal 20ms Input signal (X) 10ms 10ms 10ms Filter time REF instruction (executed) END instruction (input) processing...

  • Page 344: What Should Be Understood Before Using The Ref Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh 13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction 1. Changing the input filter The input filter value is determined by the contents of D8020 (initial value: 10 ms).

  • Page 345: Fnc 51 - Reff / Refresh And Filter Adjust

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust Outline The digital input filter time of the inputs X000 to X017 can be changed using this instruction or D8020.
  • Page 346 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust Cautions 1. Setting the filter time "n" Set "n" within the range from K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C) [0 to 60 ms]. 2.

  • Page 347: What Should Be Understood Before Using Reff Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust 13.2.1 What should be understood before using REFF instruction Generally, a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms is provided for inputs in PLCs as countermeasures against chattering and noise at the input contacts.

  • Page 348: Fnc 52 - Mtr / Input Matrix

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix Outline This instruction reads matrix input as 8-point input × "n"-point output (transistor) in the time division method. 1.
  • Page 349 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix The figure below shows an example of the FX series main unit (sink input/sink output). For writing details, refer to the following manuals of the PLC used.
  • Page 350 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix Program example n=Three outputs (Y020, Y021 and Y022) are set to ON in turn repeatedly. Every time an output is set to ON, eight inputs in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd columns are received in turn repeatedly, and stored to M30 to M37, M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 respectively.

  • Page 351: Operation And Cautions For The Mtr Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix 13.3.1 Operation and cautions for the MTR instruction 1. Command input Setting the command input to normally Open For the MTR instruction, set the command input to normally Open.

  • Page 352: Fnc 53 - Hscs / High-Speed Counter Set

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set Outline This instruction compares a value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value, and immediately sets an external output (Y) if the two values are equivalent each other.
  • Page 353 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set Operation When the current value of the high-speed counter C255 changes from "99" to "100" or from "101" to "100", Y010 is set to ON (output refresh).
  • Page 354 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set PLCs When the HSCS instruction is used in FX PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected. Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether to use the HSCS instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.

  • Page 355: Common Cautions On Using Instructions For High-Speed Counter

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 13.4.1 Common cautions on using instructions for high-speed counter DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280) instructions are provided for high- speed counters.
  • Page 356 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 4. Caution on the counting operation when the current value is changed An instruction for the high-speed counter gives the comparison result when a pulse is input to the input (X) of the high- speed counter.
  • Page 357 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High-Speed Counter Set 6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55) instructions for the same high-speed counter When the same comparison value is used for the same high-speed counter in the HSCS, HSCR and HSZ instructions, reset (self-reset) of the comparison target high-speed counter for the HSCR instruction is executed...

  • Page 358: Fnc 54 - Hscr / High-Speed Counter Reset

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset Outline This instruction compares the value counted by a high-speed counter with a specified value at each count, and immediately resets an external output (Y) when both values become equivalent to each other.
  • Page 359 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset Related instructions The following instructions can be combined with high-speed counters: Instruction FNC No.
  • Page 360 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High-Speed Counter Reset 2. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available. Because instructions for high-speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCR (FNC 54)". 3.

  • Page 361: Fnc 55 - Hsz / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares the current value of a high-speed counter with two values (one zone), and outputs the comparison result to three bit devices (refresh).
  • Page 362 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Comparison points Make sure that the comparison value 1 and the comparison value 2 have the following relationship: ] ≤...
  • Page 363 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Cautions 1. Selection of the count comparison method When the HSZ instruction is used in FX PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, C240, C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251 and C253) are automatically switched to software counters, and the maximum frequency and total frequency of each counter are affected.
  • Page 364 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 2. Device specification range Only high-speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as 3.

  • Page 365: Program In Which Comparison Result Is Set To On When Power Is Turned On [Zcp (Fnc 11) Instruction]

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON [ZCP (FNC 11) instruction] DHSZ instruction outputs the comparison result only when a counting pulse is input.
  • Page 366 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare X000 (input pulse for C235) X010 (Start) Y010 (smaller than zone) Y011 (inside zone)

  • Page 367: Table High-Speed Comparison Mode (M8130)

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 13.6.2 Table high-speed comparison mode (M8130) This section explains the table high-speed comparison mode (high-speed pattern output) of the DHSZ instruction. When two or more outputs should be activated at one time, use the HSCT instruction which can change up to 16 outputs.
  • Page 368 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 2. Operation M8002 FNC 12 K123 D200 Comparison data DMOV FNC 12 D202 Output (Y) number...
  • Page 369 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Comparison table Present value Comparison Output (Y) of C251 SET/RST Table counter data number...

  • Page 370: Frequency Control Mode (Hsz And Plsy Instructions) (M8132)

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare 13.6.3 Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132) When the special auxiliary relay M8132 for declaring the frequency control mode is specified as in the DHSZ instruction, the special function shown below is provided if DPLSY instruction is combined.
  • Page 371 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Command input FNC 12 Comparison data D300 DMOVP FNC 12 Frequency K300 D302...
  • Page 372 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High-Speed Counter Zone Compare Output pulse characteristics Output pulse frequency (Hz) → Current value of C251 Write prescribed data in advance to data registers constructing the table as shown in this program example.

  • Page 373: Fnc 56 - Spd / Speed Detection

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Outline This instruction counts the input pulse for a specified period of time as interrupt input. The function of this instruction varies depending on the version.
  • Page 374 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (SPD) × 1 ms. The measured value is stored in The input pulse is counted only for , the present value is...
  • Page 375 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection 2. 32-bit operation (DSPD) The input pulse is counted only for [ ] x 1 ms.
  • Page 376 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection Cautions 1. Input specifications of the input • An input device X000 to X007 specified as cannot overlap the following functions or instructions: - High-speed counter - Input interrupt...

  • Page 377: Fnc 57 - Plsy / Pulse Y Output

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output Outline This instruction generates a pulse signal. →...
  • Page 378 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 2. 32-bit operation (DPLSY) A pulse train at the frequency [ ] is output by the quantity [ ] from the output (Y) Command...
  • Page 379 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 2. Monitoring the current number of generated pulses The number of pulses output from Y000 or Y001 is stored in the following special data registers: Device Description Contents of data...
  • Page 380 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 4. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX , FX and FX series main units The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed response type.
  • Page 381 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output 6. Others Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers Classification Instruction Instruction name...

  • Page 382: Fnc 58 - Pwm / Pulse Width Modulation

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation Outline This instruction outputs pulses with a specified period and ON duration. 1.
  • Page 383 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation Cautions 1. Setting the pulse width and period ≤ Make sure that the pulse width and period satisfy the relationship "...
  • Page 384 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation When special high-speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are assigned as shown in the table below.

  • Page 385: 13.10 Fnc 59 - Plsr / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

    Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup Outline This pulse output instruction has the acceleration/deceleration function. 1.
  • Page 386 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 2. 32-bit operation (DPLSR) Pulses are output from the output (Y) by the specified number [ ] with acceleration/deceleration to the maximum frequency [ ] for the time [...
  • Page 387 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup Related devices 1. Instruction execution complete flag → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
  • Page 388 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 3. Handling of pulse output terminals in FX , FX and FX series main units The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high-speed response type.
  • Page 389 Series Programmable Controllers 13 High-Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup 5. Others Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers Classification Instruction Instruction name...

  • Page 390: Handy Instruction – Fnc 60 To Fnc 69

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 FNC 60 to FNC 69 provide handy instructions which achieve complicated control in a minimum sequence program. FNC No.

  • Page 391: Fnc 60 - Ist / Initial State

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State Outline This instruction automatically controls the initial state and special auxiliary relays in a step ladder program. →...
  • Page 392 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 1. Control of devices by switch operations (occupied devices) While the command input is ON, the following devices are automatically switched and controlled. While the command input is OFF, the devices are not switched.

  • Page 393: Ist Instruction Equivalent Circuit

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 14.1.1 IST instruction equivalent circuit The details on special auxiliary relays (M) and initial state relays (S0 to S9) which are automatically controlled by the IST instruction are as shown in the equivalent circuit below.

  • Page 394: Example Of Ist Instruction Introduction (Example Of Workpiece Transfer Mechanism)

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism) 1. Operation mode Mechanism for transferring a workpiece from the Stepping point A to the point B using the robot hand...
  • Page 395 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 3. Assignment of mode selection inputs For using IST instruction, it is necessary to assign inputs having consecutive device numbers as shown below for mode inputs.
  • Page 396 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 4. Special auxiliary relay (M) for the IST instruction Auxiliary relays (M) used in the IST instruction are classified into two types. Some auxiliary relays are automatically controlled by the IST instruction itself according to the situation.
  • Page 397 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 5. Program example Circuit diagram In the sequence circuit shown below, all areas except shaded areas are standard. Program the shaded areas according to the contents of control.
  • Page 398 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State c) Zero return operation mode Programming is not required when the zero return operation mode is not provided. It is necessary to set M8043 (zero return complete) to ON before starting the automatic mode.
  • Page 399 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State d) Automatic mode (stepping operation mode, cycle operation mode or continuous operation mode) SFC block State number Initial state for...
  • Page 400 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State 6. List program The list program for the circuit diagram shown on the previous page is as shown below: 0 LD X 004 32 STL S...

  • Page 401: Fnc 61 - Ser / Search A Data Stack

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack Outline This instruction searches for the same data, maximum value and minimum value in a data table.
  • Page 402 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack Operation example a) Example of search result table configuration and data Search result Searched data Comparison data...
  • Page 403 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack Operation example a) Example of search result table configuration and data Search result Searched data Comparison...

  • Page 404: Fnc 62 - Absd / Absolute Drum Sequencer

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer Outline This instruction creates many output patterns corresponding to the current value of a counter. 1.
  • Page 405 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer Write the following data to +2n-1 in advance by a transfer instruction: Rising point Falling point Target output...
  • Page 406 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer Write the following data to [ +1] to [ +4n-2, +4n-1] in advance using a transfer instruction: Rising point Falling point Target output...

  • Page 407: Fnc 63 - Incd / Incremental Drum Sequencer

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer Outline This instruction creates many output patterns using a pair of counters. 1.
  • Page 408 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer Operation X000 FNC 63 D300 INCD M8013 K9999 1 sec clock Timing chart Suppose that the following data is written in advance by a transfer instruction: Device storing data...

  • Page 409: Fnc 64 - Ttmr / Teaching Timer

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer Outline This instruction measures the period of time in which TTMR instruction is ON. Use this instruction to adjust the set value of a timer by a pushbutton switch.
  • Page 410 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer Cautions 1. When the command contact turns OFF The current value [ +1] of the pressing and holding time is reset, and the teaching time will not change any more.

  • Page 411: Fnc 65 - Stmr / Special Timer

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer Outline This instruction can easily make off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers. 1.
  • Page 412 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer Command input Flicker In the program shown below which turns OFF STMR instruction at the NC contact of +3, flicker is output to +1 and +3 are occupied.

  • Page 413: Fnc 66 - Alt / Alternate State

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State Outline This instruction alternates a bit device (from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON) when the input turns ON. 1.
  • Page 414 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State Caution 1. When using (continuous operation type) ALT instruction • When ALT instruction is used, a specified bit device is alternated in every operation cycle. To alternate a specified device by turning the command ON or OFF, use the (pulse operation type) ALTP instruction, or use a pulse operation type command contact such as LDP.

  • Page 415: Fnc 67 - Ramp / Ramp Variable Value

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value Outline This instruction obtains the data which changes between the start value (initial value) and the end value (target value) over the specified "n"...
  • Page 416 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value • After transfer is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON, and the value is returned to the value.

  • Page 417: Fnc 68 - Rotc / Rotary Table Control

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control Outline This instruction is suitable for efficient control of the rotary table for putting/taking a product into/out of the rotary table. 1.
  • Page 418 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (ROTC) The table rotation is controlled by "m2", so that a product can be efficiently put into or taken out of the rotary table divided into "m1"...
  • Page 419 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control Operation conditions The conditions required to use this instruction are as shown in the example below. Rotation detection signal: X →...

  • Page 420: Fnc 69 - Sort / Sort Tabulated Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data Outline This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified group data (column) sorted by line in ascending order.
  • Page 421 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data • The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4).
  • Page 422 Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K3 (column No. 3)" Column No.

  • Page 423: External Fx I/O Device – Fnc 70 To Fnc 79

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 FNC 70 to FNC 79 provide instructions to receive data from and send data to external devices mainly using inputs and outputs in PLCs.

  • Page 424: Fnc 70 - Tky / Ten Key Input

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input Outline This instruction sets data for timers and counters through ten key inputs ranging from "0"...
  • Page 425 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input Key pressing information [ +10] - For the key pressing information, +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys.
  • Page 426 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input 3. Number of occupied device Ten bit devices are occupied from for connecting the ten keys.
  • Page 427 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input 3. Timing chart X000 When the ten keys are pressed in the order "[1] → [2] → [3] →...

  • Page 428: Fnc 71 - Hky / Hexadecimal Input

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Outline This instruction multiplexes four X-devices and four Y-devices to allow for 16 key (0 to F) 4-digit (byte) input. Keys 0 to 9 stores numerical values, and keys A to F represent function keys.
  • Page 429 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9: - When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
  • Page 430 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input 2. 32-bit operation (DHKY) Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into [ ] from the least significant byte.
  • Page 431 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input Program example X004 FNC 71 X000 Y000 The figure below shows an example of the FX series main unit (sink input/sink output).

  • Page 432: Fnc 72 - Dsw / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) Outline This instruction reads the set value of digital switches.
  • Page 433 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) Specification of the number of sets ("n") - When using one set of 4 digits [n = k1] A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to +3 is read in turn by the strobe signal +3, and stored in binary format to...
  • Page 434 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input) 2. Connection diagram The figure below shows an example of the FX series main unit (sink input/sink output).

  • Page 435: Fnc 73 - Segd / Seven Segment Decoder

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder Outline This instruction decodes data, and turns the seven-segment display unit (1 digit) ON.
  • Page 436 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder 2. Seven-segment decoding table Seven-segment Display Hexadeci- configuration data mal num- −...

  • Page 437: Fnc 74 - Segl / Seven Segment With Latch

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch Outline This instruction controls one or two sets of 4-digit seven-segment display units having the latch function.
  • Page 438 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch Example of connecting one seven-segment display unit The figure below shows an example of the FX series main unit (sink output).
  • Page 439 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description...

  • Page 440: How To Select A Seven-Segment Display Unit

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch 15.5.1 How to select a seven-segment display unit When selecting a seven-segment display unit based on its electrical characteristics, refer to the manual below: →...
  • Page 441 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch 3. Confirming the logic of the seven-segment display unit Data input Logic Negative logic...

  • Page 442: Fnc 75 - Arws / Arrow Switch

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch Outline This instruction inputs data through arrow switches used for shifting the digit and incrementing/decrementing the numeric value in each digit.
  • Page 443 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch Contents of the display and operation part Display/operation panel To outputs in ←...
  • Page 444 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch Cautions 1. Setting of the parameter "n" Refer to the explanation of parameter setting in the SEGL (FNC 74) instruction. The setting range is from 0 to 3 for the ARWS instruction.
  • Page 445 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch Program D300 D301 Practical timer circuit D399 X000 Decrement X001 Increment X002 Higher digit...

  • Page 446: Fnc 76 - Asc / Ascii Code Data Input

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input Outline This instruction converts a half-width alphanumeric character string into ASCII codes.
  • Page 447 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input Extension function When M8161 is set to ON for making the extension function valid, a half-width alphanumeric character string specified is converted into ASCII codes, and transferred in turn only to low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of Command input...

  • Page 448: Fnc 77 - Pr / Print (Ascii Code)

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) Outline This instruction outputs ASCII code data to outputs (Y) in parallel.
  • Page 449 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) Extension function 1. 16-byte serial output The number of output characters varies depending on the ON/OFF status of the special auxiliary relay M8027. While M8027 is OFF, 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters) is executed.
  • Page 450 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) Cautions 1. Command input and instruction operation While the command input is ON: Even if the command input is continuously ON, execution is completed after a series of outputs.

  • Page 451: Fnc 78 - From / Read From A Special Function Block

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Outline This instruction reads the contents of buffer memories (BMF) in a special extension unit/block attached to a PLC.
  • Page 452 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block 2. 32-bit operation (DFROM and DFROMP) Special extension unit/block (BFM) →...
  • Page 453 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Program examples In programs, the contents of buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension units/blocks are read (transferred) to data registers (D), extension registers (R) and auxiliary relays (M) with digit specification using the FROM instruction and direct specification of buffer memories This function is supported only in FX...

  • Page 454: Common Items Between From Instruction And To Instruction (Details)

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block 15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details) Contents specified by operands 1.
  • Page 455 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed (M8028) 1.

  • Page 456: 15.10 Fnc 79 - To / Write To A Special Function Block

    Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block Outline This instruction writes data from a PLC to buffer memories (BFM) in a special extension unit/block.
  • Page 457 Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block 2. 32-bit operation (DTO and DTOP) PLC (word device) →...

  • Page 458: External Fx Device – Fnc 80 To Fnc 89

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 FNC 80 to FNC 89 provide control instructions for special adapters mainly connected to serial ports. PID control loop instruction is included in this group.

  • Page 459: Fnc 80 - Rs / Serial Communication

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication Outline This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of a serial port (only ch1) in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
  • Page 460 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication Related devices → For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual. Device Name Device...

  • Page 461: Fnc 81 - Prun / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Outline This instruction handles the device number of with digit specification and the device number of...
  • Page 462 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Decimal bit device → Octal bit device Command input FNC 81 M0 to M7, M10 to M17 →...

  • Page 463: Fnc 82 - Asci / Hexadecimal To Ascii Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion Outline This instruction converts hexadecimal code into ASCII code.
  • Page 464 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is also used for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions.) Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in and later is converted into ASCII code, and transferred to the high-...
  • Page 465 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON) (M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions.) Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in and later is converted into an ASCII code, and transferred to low-order 8 bits of each device...

  • Page 466: Fnc 83 - Hex / Ascii To Hexadecimal Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion Outline This instruction converts ASCII codes into hexadecimal codes.
  • Page 467 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD, and CRC instructions.) Each ASCII code stored in high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of devices and later is converted into a hexadecimal code, and transferred to devices...
  • Page 468 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON) (M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions.) Each ASCII code stored in the low-order 8 bits of each device and later is converted into a hexadecimal code, and transferred to device...

  • Page 469: Fnc 84 - Ccd / Check Code

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code Outline This instruction calculates the horizontal parity value and sum check value in the error check methods used in communication.
  • Page 470 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code 2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.) With regard to "n"...
  • Page 471 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code 3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON) (M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.) With regard to "n"...

  • Page 472: Fnc 85 - Vrrd / Volume Read

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read Outline This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board attached to the PLC main unit. 1.
  • Page 473 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read 2. Example in which the analog values of the variable analog potentiometers Nos. 0 to 7 are read in turn, and used as analog timers K0 to K7 are specified in of the VRRD instruction in accordance with the values of the variable potentiometers...

  • Page 474: Fnc 86 - Vrsc / Volume Scale

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale Outline This instruction reads the value of a variable analog potentiometer on the variable analog potentiometer board attached to the PLC main unit as a numeric value ranging from 0 to 10.
  • Page 475 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale Program example 1. Example in which the scale value is used as a rotary switch One of the auxiliary relays from M0 to M10 turns ON in accordance with the scale value ranging from 0 to 10 of the specified variable analog potentiometer.

  • Page 476: Fnc 87 - Rs2 / Serial Communication 2

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 Outline This instruction sends and receives data using non-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
  • Page 477 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 Related devices → For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition. Device Device Name...
  • Page 478 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2 Cautions → For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition. •...

  • Page 479: Fnc 88 - Pid / Pid Control Loop

    Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop Outline This instruction executes PID control which changes the output value according to the input variation.
  • Page 480 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop 2. Set items Number of Set item Description occupied points •...
  • Page 481 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop Set item Setting Value Remarks Input variation (incremental) It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in +1 for 0 to 32767 alarm set value...
  • Page 482 Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop Cautions 1. When using two or more PID instructions Two or more PID instructions can be executed at the same time. (There is no limitation in the number of loops.) However, make sure that and other operands specified in each instruction are different to each other.

  • Page 483: 17. Data Transfer 2 - Fnc100 To Fnc109

    Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 FNC100 to FNC109 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for executing special processing.

  • Page 484: Fnc102 - Zpush/Batch Store Of Index Register

    Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register Outline This instruction temporarily batch-stores the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7. For restoring the present value of temporarily batch-stored index registers, use the ZPOP (FNC103) instruction.
  • Page 485 Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register The figure below shows the data structure batch-stored in and later. · When the nest structure is not used ·...
  • Page 486 Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register Program example In the program shown below, the contents of the index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of subroutine program are batch-stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the pointer P0.

  • Page 487: Fnc103 - Zpop/Batch Pop Of Index Register

    Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register 17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register Outline This instruction restores the contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z8 which were batch-stored temporarily by ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.

  • Page 488: 18. Floating Point - Fnc110 To Fnc139

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 FNC110 to FNC119, FNC120 to FNC129 and FNC130 to FNC139 provide instructions for conversion, comparison, arithmetic operations, square root operation, trigonometry, etc.
  • Page 489 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference Section Floating Point to Integer Conversion 18.17 Section Floating Point Sine 18.18 Section Floating Point Cosine 18.19 Section Floating Point Tangent...

  • Page 490: Fnc110 - Ecmp / Floating Point Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare Outline This instruction compares two data values (binary floating point), and outputs the result (larger, same or smaller) to three consecutive bit devices.

  • Page 491: Fnc111 - Ezcp / Floating Point Zone Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares data (binary floating point) with two values (one zone), and outputs the comparison result to three consecutive bit devices.
  • Page 492 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare Explanation of function and operation 1. 32-bit operation (DEZCP and DEZCPP) The comparison values [ ], [ ] are compared with the comparison source [ ] as floating point data, and one of the bits among...

  • Page 493: Fnc112 - Emov / Floating Point Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move 18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move Outline This instruction transfers binary floating point data. →...

  • Page 494: Fnc116 - Estr / Floating Point To Character String Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes) having a specified number of digits.
  • Page 495 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion 2. In the case of decimal point format Decimal point b8 b7 format Total number of ASCII code in "(specified...
  • Page 496 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion - When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than "0", "2EH (.)" is automatically stored in "specified number of digits of decimal part + 1"th digit.
  • Page 497 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion • The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by +2 is from 0 to 7.
  • Page 498 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion - The exponent part is fixed to 2 digits. When the exponent part is 1 digit, "30H (0)" is stored after the sign of the exponent part. Total number of digits (12) Fixed to 2 digits.
  • Page 499 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion Program examples In the program example shown below, the contents (binary floating point data) of R0 and R1 are converted according to the contents specified by R10 to R12, and then stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON X000 FNC116...

  • Page 500: Fnc117 - Eval / Character String To Floating Point Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion Outline This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
  • Page 501 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion a) In the case of decimal point format b8 b7 31H(1) 2DH(-) 30H(0) 2EH(.)
  • Page 502 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion b) In the case of exponent format b8 b7 20H(.) 2DH(-) 2EH(.) 31H(1) 35H(5)
  • Page 503 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion Related devices → For the use methods of the zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Description Device Name...
  • Page 504 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion In the program shown below, a character string stored in D10 and later is converted into binary floating point, and stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON X000 FNC117...

  • Page 505: Fnc118 - Ebcd / Floating Point To Scientific Notation Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary floating point into scientific notation.

  • Page 506: Fnc119 - Ebin / Scientific Notation To Floating Point Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Outline This instruction converts scientific notation stored in devices into binary floating point.
  • Page 507 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion Program example By DEBIN instruction, a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary floating point. Example: Converting "3.14"...

  • Page 508: Fnc120 - Eadd / Floating Point Addition

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition 18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition Outline This instruction executes addition of two binary floating point data. →...

  • Page 509: Fnc121 - Esub / Floating Point Subtraction

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction 18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction Outline This instruction executes subtraction of two binary floating point data. →...

  • Page 510: 18.10 Fnc122 - Emul / Floating Point Multiplication

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication Outline This instruction executes multiplication of two binary floating point data. →...

  • Page 511: 18.11 Fnc123 - Ediv / Floating Point Division

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division Outline This instruction executes division of two binary floating point. →...

  • Page 512: 18.12 Fnc124 - Exp / Floating Point Exponent

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent Outline This instruction executes exponential operation whose base is "e (2.71828)". →...
  • Page 513 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent Program example In the program example shown below, the exponential operation is executed for a value set in the 2-digit BCD format in X020 to X027, and the operation result is stored in the binary floating point format to D0 and D1 when X000 turns X000 FNC 19...

  • Page 514: 18.13 Fnc125 - Loge / Floating Point Natural Logarithm

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm Outline This instruction executes the natural logarithm operation. →...
  • Page 515 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm Program example In the program example shown below, natural logarithm of "10" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 516: 18.14 Fnc126 - Log10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm Outline This instruction executes the common logarithm operation. →...
  • Page 517 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm Program example In the program example shown below, common logarithm of "15" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30 and D31 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 518: 18.15 Fnc127 - Esqr / Floating Point Square Root

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root Outline This instruction obtains the square root of binary floating point. →...

  • Page 519: 18.16 Fnc128 - Eneg / Floating Point Negation

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation Outline This instruction inverts the sign of binary floating point (real number) data. →...

  • Page 520: 18.17 Fnc129 - Int / Floating Point To Integer Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary floating point data into a binary integer which is a normal data format inside PLCs (binary floating point →...
  • Page 521 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion Related devices → For the methods of zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description...

  • Page 522: Fnc130 - Sin / Floating Point Sine

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine Outline This instruction obtains the sine value of an angle (in radians). →...

  • Page 523: 18.19 Fnc131 - Cos / Floating Point Cosine

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine Outline This instruction obtains the cosine value of an angle (in radians). →...

  • Page 524: 18.20 Fnc132 - Tan / Floating Point Tangent

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent Outline This instruction obtains the tangent value of an angle (in radians). →...

  • Page 525: 18.21 Fnc133 - Asin / Floating Point Arc Sine

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine Outline −1 This instruction executes SIN (arc sine) operation.
  • Page 526 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine Program example −1 In the program example shown below, the SIN value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 527: 18.22 Fnc134 - Acos / Floating Point Arc Cosine

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine Outline −1 This instruction executes COS (arc cosine) operation.
  • Page 528 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine Program example −1 In the program example shown below, the COS value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 529: 18.23 Fnc135 - Atan / Floating Point Arc Tangent

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent Outline −1 This instruction executes the TAN (arc tangent) operation.
  • Page 530 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent Program example −1 In the program example shown below, the TAN value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 531: 18.24 Fnc136 - Rad / Floating Point Degrees To Radians Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion Outline This instruction converts a value in degrees into a value in radians.
  • Page 532 Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion Program example In the program example shown below, a 4-digit BCD value set in degrees in X020 to X037 is converted into a binary floating point value in radians, and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 533: 18.25 Fnc137 - Deg / Floating Point Radians To Degrees Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion Outline This instruction converts a value in radians into a value in degrees.

  • Page 534: 19. Data Operation 2 - Fnc140 To Fnc149

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 FNC140 to FNC149 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for executing special processing.

  • Page 535: Fnc140 - Wsum / Sum Of Word Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data Outline This instruction calculates the sum of consecutive 16-bit or 32-bit data. When calculating the addition data (sum value) in units of byte (8 bits), use the CCD (FNC 84) instruction.
  • Page 536 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data Related instruction Instruction Description Check code CCD (FNC 84) Calculates the sum of 16-bit data in units of byte (8 bits) and the horizontal parity. Caution •...

  • Page 537: Fnc141 - Wtob / Word To Byte

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE Outline This instruction separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits). 1.
  • Page 538 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE When "n" is an odd number, only the low-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is regarded as the target data as shown in the figure below.

  • Page 539: Fnc142 - Btow / Byte To Word

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD Outline This instruction combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data. 1.
  • Page 540 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD Related instruction Instruction Description WTOB (FNC141) Separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits). Caution Devices storing the combination source data may be equivalent to devices storing the combined data.

  • Page 541: Fnc143 - Uni / 4-Bit Linking Of Word Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data Outline This instruction combines the low-order 4 bits of consecutive 16-bit data.
  • Page 542 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data Related instruction Instruction Description DIS (FNC144) Separates 16-bit data in 4-bit units. Errors An operation error occurs in the following cases;...

  • Page 543: Fnc144 - Dis / 4-Bit Grouping Of Word Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data Outline This instruction separates 16-bit data into 4 bit units.
  • Page 544 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data Errors An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 545: Fnc147 - Swap / Byte Swap

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap 19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap Outline This instruction swaps the high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of a word device. 1.

  • Page 546: Fnc149 - Sort2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

    Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 Outline This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified group data (column) sorted by line in either ascending or descending order.
  • Page 547 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and 4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4).
  • Page 548 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 3. Operation examples When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3)" for the following sorting source data, the operations shown below result.
  • Page 549 Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2 Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Device Name Description...
  • Page 550 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 FNC150 to FNC159 provide positioning instructions using the built-in pulse output function of the PLC. →...

  • Page 551: 20 Positioning Control - Fnc150 To Fnc159

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return Outline This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the PLC.
  • Page 552 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return 4 : When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX PLC, the rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.

  • Page 553: Fnc151 - Dvit / Interrupt Positioning

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning Outline This instruction executes one-speed interrupt constant quantity feed. →...
  • Page 554 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning 2 : When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX PLC, the rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.

  • Page 555: Fnc152 - Tbl / Batch Data Positioning Mode

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode Outline This instruction executes one specified table operation from the data table set in GX Developer (Ver. 8.24A or later). →...

  • Page 556: Fnc155 - Abs / Absolute Current Value Read

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read 20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read Outline This instruction reads the absolute position (ABS) data when the Mitsubishi servo amplifier (equipped with the absolute position detection function) MR-H, MR-J2(S), or MR-J3 is connected.

  • Page 557: Fnc156 - Zrn / Zero Return

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return Outline This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside the PLC.
  • Page 558 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return Explanation of function and operation Command input FNC156 Caution on writing during RUN During RUN, avoid writing while the ZRN (FNC156) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output). Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC156 instruction while pulses are output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

  • Page 559: Fnc157 - Plsv / Variable Speed Pulse Output

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output Outline This instruction outputs variable speed pulses with an assigned rotation direction. →...
  • Page 560 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output Explanation of function and operation Command input FNC157 PLSV Caution on writing during RUN During RUN, avoid writing while PLSV (FNC157) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).

  • Page 561: Fnc158 - Drvi / Drive To Increment

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment Outline This instruction executes one-speed positioning by incremental drive. The movement distance from the present position can be specified, positive or negative.
  • Page 562 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment 2 :When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX PLC, the rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.

  • Page 563: Fnc159 - Drva / Drive To Absolute

    Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute Outline This instruction executes one-speed positioning by absolute drive. The movement distance from the zero point can be specified.
  • Page 564 Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute 2 : When using a special high-speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX PLC, the rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.

  • Page 565: 21. Real Time Clock Control - Fnc160 To Fnc169

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 FNC160 to FNC169 provide operation and comparison instructions for the time data. These instructions can set the time of the built-in PLC real time clock, and converts the format of the time data.

  • Page 566: Fnc160 - Tcmp / Rtc Data Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare Outline This instruction compares the comparison time with the time data, and turns ON or OFF bit devices according to the comparison result.
  • Page 567 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (TCMP) The comparison time (hour, minute, and second) stored in , and is compared with the time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in...

  • Page 568: Fnc161 - Tzcp / Rtc Data Zone Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare Outline This instruction compares two comparison time (comparison time zone) with the time data, and turns ON or OFF the specified bit devices according to the comparison results.
  • Page 569 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare Cautions Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied respectively by , and Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.

  • Page 570: Fnc162 - Tadd / Rtc Data Addition

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition Outline This instruction executes addition of two time data, and stores the addition result to word devices. 1.
  • Page 571 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition Cautions Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied by respectively. Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the built-in PLC real time clock Read the values of special data registers using the TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as the operands.

  • Page 572: Fnc163 - Tsub / Rtc Data Subtraction

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction Outline This instruction executes subtraction of two time data, and stores the subtraction result to word devices. 1.
  • Page 573 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction Cautions Number of occupied devices Three devices are occupied by respectively. Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the built-in PLC real time clock Read the values of special data registers using the TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word devices as the operands.

  • Page 574: Fnc164 - Htos / Hour To Second Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion Outline This instruction converts the time data in units of "hour, minute, and second" into data in units of "second". 1.
  • Page 575 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DHTOS and DHTOSP) The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in +1, and +2 is converted into data in units of "second", and stored to...

  • Page 576: Fnc165 - Stoh / Second To Hour Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion Outline This instruction converts the time data in units of "second" into data in units of "hour, minute, and second". 1.
  • Page 577 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DSTOH and DSTOHP) The time data in units of "second" stored in +1 and is converted into data in units of "hour, minute, and second", and stored to three devices...

  • Page 578: Fnc166 - Trd / Read Rtc Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data 21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data Outline This instruction reads the clock data of the built-in PLC real time clock. 1.

  • Page 579: Fnc167 - Twr / Set Rtc Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data Outline This instruction writes the clock data to the built-in PLC real time clock. 1.
  • Page 580 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data Caution 1. Number of occupied devices Seven devices are occupied by Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. Program example 1.

  • Page 581: Fnc169 - Hour / Hour Meter

    Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter Outline This instruction measures the ON time of the input contact in units of hour. 1.
  • Page 582 Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter 2. 32-bit operation Command input FNC169 DHOUR ] : Time after which is set to ON Specify the high-order side in +1, and the low-order side in ] : Current value in units of hour...

  • Page 583: 22. External Device - Fnc170 To Fnc179

    Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 FNC170 to FNC179 provide conversion instructions for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and instructions dedicated to analog blocks.

  • Page 584: Fnc170 - Gry / Decimal To Gray Code Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion Outline This instruction converts a binary value into a gray code, and transfers it. 1.

  • Page 585: Fnc171 - Gbin / Gray Code To Decimal Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion Outline This instruction converts a gray code into a binary value, and transfers it. 1.

  • Page 586: Fnc176 - Rd3A / Read Form Dedicated Analog Block

    Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block 22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block Outline This instruction reads an analog input value from the analog block FX or FX -2AD.

  • Page 587: Fnc177 - Wr3A / Write To Dedicated Analog Block

    Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block 22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block Outline This instruction writes a digital value to the analog block FX or FX -2DA.

  • Page 588: 23. Introduction Of Alternate Instructions - Fnc180

    Series Programmable Controllers 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 23.1 Instruction correspondence table 23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 23.1 Instruction correspondence table Outline EXTR instruction is provided for FX and FX PLCs.

  • Page 589: 24. Others - Fnc181 To Fnc189

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189 FNC181 to FNC189 provide instructions for generating random numbers, executing CRC data operations, and processing data in high-speed counter operations. FNC No.

  • Page 590: Fnc182 - Comrd / Read Device Comment Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data Outline This instruction reads the comment data for registered devices written to the PLC by programming software such as GX Developer.
  • Page 591 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data The final device of is as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091. ON/OFF status Contents of processing M8091 = OFF...

  • Page 592: Fnc184 - Rnd / Random Number Generation

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation Outline This instruction generates random numbers. 1. Instruction format FNC 184 Mnemonic Operation Condition...

  • Page 593: Fnc186 - Duty / Timing Pulse Generation

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation Outline This instruction generates the timing signal whose one cycle corresponds to the specified number of operation cycles. 1.
  • Page 594 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation When the command input is set to ON, the operation is started. The timing clock output destination device is set to ON or OFF by the END instruction.

  • Page 595: Fnc188 - Crc / Cyclic Redundancy Check

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check Outline This CRC instruction calculates the CRC (cyclic redundancy check) value which is an error check method used in communication.
  • Page 596 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) In this mode, the operation is executed for high-order 8 bits (1 byte) and low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of a device specified The operation result is stored to one 16-bit device specified in M8000 M8161...
  • Page 597 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check 2. Related device Related device Description CRC instruction operates in the 8-bit mode. M8161 CRC instruction operates in the 16-bit mode. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
  • Page 598 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check Program example In the program example shown below, the CRC value of the ASCII code “0123456” stored in D100 to D106 is generated and stored to D0 when M0 turns ON.

  • Page 599: Fnc189 - Hcmov / High-Speed Counter Move

    Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move Outline This instruction updates the current value of a specified high-speed counter or ring counter. The function of this instruction varies depending on the PLC version.
  • Page 600 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move 2. High-speed counter current value update timing and the effect of DHCMOV instruction High-speed counter current value update timing When a pulse is input to an input terminal for a high-speed counter (C235 to C255), the high-speed counter executes up-counting or down-counting.
  • Page 601 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move If two or more DHCMOV instructions are used in one input interrupt program, only the first instruction (just after the interrupt pointer) is executed when the interrupt is generated.
  • Page 602 Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High-Speed Counter Move Program examples 1. Program example 1 In the program example below, the current value of the high-speed counter C235 is compared in each operation cycle, and then the output Y000 is set to ON if the current value is "K500"...

  • Page 603: 25. Block Data Operation - Fnc190 To Fnc199

    Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 FNC190 to FNC199 provide instructions for adding, subtracting and comparing block data. FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function...

  • Page 604: Fnc192 - Bk+ / Block Data Addition

    Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition Outline This instruction adds binary block data. 1.
  • Page 605 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition 2. 32-bit operation (DBK+ and DBK+P) Command input FNC192 DBK+P "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ ] are added to "2n"...
  • Page 606 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 607: Nfc193 - Bk- / Block Data Subtraction

    Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction Outline This instruction subtracts binary block data. 1.
  • Page 608 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction 2. 32-bit operation (DBK- and DBK-P) Command input FNC193 DBK-P "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ ] are subtracted from "2n"...
  • Page 609 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 610: Fnc194~199 - Bkcmp=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

    Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Outline These instructions compare block data in the comparison condition set in each instruction.
  • Page 611 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (BKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / BKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P) "n"...
  • Page 612 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare 2. 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / DBKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P) "n"...
  • Page 613 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Caution • When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high-speed counters) For comparing 32-bit counters and 32-bit high-speed counters (C200 to C255), make sure to use an instruction for 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, DBKCMP>, DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or DBKCMP>=).
  • Page 614 Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare Program example In the program shown below, four 16-bit binary data starting from D100 are compared with four 16-bit binary data starting from D200 by BKCMP= (FNC194) instruction when X020 is set to ON, and the comparison result is stored in four points starting from M10.

  • Page 615: 26. Character String Control - Fnc200 To Fnc209

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 FNC200 to FNC209 provide instructions for controlling character strings such as linking character string data, replacing some characters and extracting character string data.

  • Page 616: Fnc200 - Str / Bin To Character String Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary data into character strings (ASCII codes).
  • Page 617 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (STR and STRP) All digits (specified by ) of 16-bit binary data stored in are converted into ASCII codes while the...
  • Page 618 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion - When the number of all digits stored in Number of all digits excluding the sign and decimal Number of...
  • Page 619 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion Converted character string data is stored in and later as shown below. - For the sign, "space"...
  • Page 620 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion • When the devices and later storing a character string exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706) Program example In the program below, the 16-bit binary data stored in D10 is converted into a character string in accordance with the...

  • Page 621: Fnc201 - Val / Character String To Bin Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion Outline This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
  • Page 622 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion For example, when a character string "-123.45" is specified in and later, the conversion result is stored in as shown below.
  • Page 623 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DVAL and DVALP) A character string stored in and later is converted into 32-bit binary data.
  • Page 624 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion ] stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimal point ignored. For the character string located in and later, the "space"...
  • Page 625 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion Program example In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D22 is regarded as an integer value, converted into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.

  • Page 626: Fnc202 - $+ / Link Character Strings

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings Outline This instruction links a character string to another character string. →...
  • Page 627 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings Cautions • When directly specifying a character string, up to 32 characters can be specified (input). However, this limitation in the number of characters is not applied when a word device is specified in •...

  • Page 628: Fnc203 - Len / Character String Length Detection

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection Outline This instruction detects the number of characters (bytes) of a specified character string. →...
  • Page 629 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection Caution • This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but the character string length is handled in byte units (8 bits).

  • Page 630: Fnc204 - Right / Extracting Character String Data From The Right

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the right end of a specified character string.
  • Page 631 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right In the case of “n = 5” b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 42H(B) 41H(A) 32H(2)

  • Page 632: Fnc205 - Left / Extracting Character String Data From The Left

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the left end of a specified character string.
  • Page 633 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left ASCII code for 1st character In the case of "n = 7" b15----------------------b8b7----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 42H(B)

  • Page 634: Fnc206 - Midr / Random Selection Of Character Strings

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings Outline This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from arbitrary positions of a specified character string.
  • Page 635 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings Explanation of function and operation 1. 16-bit operation (MIDR and MIDRP) "...
  • Page 636 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 637: Fnc207 - Midw / Random Replacement Of Character Strings

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings Outline This instruction replaces the characters in arbitrary positions inside designated character string with a specified character string.
  • Page 638 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings • The character string stored in and later or and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until “00H”...
  • Page 639 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings Cautions This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but please note the following: •...

  • Page 640: Fnc208 - Instr / Character String Search

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search Outline This instruction searches a specified character string within another character string. 1.
  • Page 641 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search A character string can be directly specified in the character string Character string to be searched Character string b8 b7 "AB"...

  • Page 642: Fnc209 - $Mov / Character String Transfer

    Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer Outline This instruction transfers character string data. →...
  • Page 643 Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer b8 b7 b8 b7 It is the same as the 32H(2) 31H(1) 32H(2) 31H(1) character string 34H(4)

  • Page 644: 27. Data Operation 3 - Fnc210 To Fnc219

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 FNC210 to FNC219 provide instructions for reading last-in data and controlling leftward/rightward shift instructions with carry.

  • Page 645: Fnc210 - Fdel / Deleting Data From Tables

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables Outline This instruction deletes an arbitrary data value from a data table. 1.
  • Page 646 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 647: Fnc211 - Fins / Inserting Data To Tables

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables Outline This instruction inserts a data value into an arbitrary position in a data table. 1.
  • Page 648 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 649: Fnc212 - Pop / Shift Last Data Read [Filo Control]

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] Outline This instruction reads the last data written by a shift write (SFWR) instruction for FILO control.
  • Page 650 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] • Subtract “1” from the value of the pointer data Data area Pointer +n-1...
  • Page 651 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] Program example Among values stored in D20 input first to D101 to D106, the last value input is stored to D10, and “1” is subtracted from the number of stored data (pointer D100) every time X000 turns ON.

  • Page 652: Fnc213 - Sfr / Bit Shift Right With Carry

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry Outline This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device rightward by “n”...
  • Page 653 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry When a bit device is specified by digit specification bits are shifted according to the data bit specification. Command input FNC213...

  • Page 654: Fnc214 - Sfl / Bit Shift Left With Carry

    Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry Outline This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device leftward by “n”...
  • Page 655 Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry When a bit device is specified by digit specification bits are shifted according to the data of bit specification. Command input FNC214...

  • Page 656: 28. Data Comparison - Fnc220 To Fnc249

    Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 FNC220 to FNC249 provide data comparison instructions which can be handled as contact symbols in programming such as LD, AND and OR.
  • Page 657 Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference − − Section 28.3 OR Compare OR> Section 28.3 OR Compare > OR> OR< Section 28.3 OR Compare <...

  • Page 658: Fnc224~230 - Ld =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison

    Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees so that an operation is started.
  • Page 659 Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison Explanation of function and operation FNC224 to FNC230 are data comparison instructions connected to bus lines. The contents of are compared with the contents of in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive...

  • Page 660: Fnc232~238 - And=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

    Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.
  • Page 661 Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Explanation of function and operation FNC232 to FNC237 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in series. The contents of are compared with the contents of in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive...

  • Page 662: Fnc240~246 - Or=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

    Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Outline These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.
  • Page 663 Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison Explanation of function and operation FNC240 to 246 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in parallel. The contents of are compared with the contents of in binary format, and a contact becomes conductive...

  • Page 664: 29. Data Table Operation - Fnc250 To Fnc269

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference − − − − − − − −...

  • Page 665: Fnc256 - Limit / Limit Control

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control Outline This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value for an input numeric value, and controls the output value using these limit values.
  • Page 666 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control • When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “32767” to the upper limit value specified 2.
  • Page 667 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control Program examples 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the limit values “500” to “5000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 668: Fnc257 - Band / Dead Band Control

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control Outline This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value of the dead band for an input numeric value, and controls the output value using these limit values.
  • Page 669 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control 2. 32-bit operation (DBAND and DBANDP) Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ ] compares to the dead band range between [ ] and [...
  • Page 670 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control Program examples 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the dead band from “-1000” to “+1000”, and a controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 671: Fnc258 - Zone / Zone Control

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control Outline Depending on how the input value compares to positive or negative, the output value is controlled by the bias value specified.
  • Page 672 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control 2. 32-bit operation (DZONE and DZONEP) The bias value specified by [ ] or [ ] is added to the input value specified by [ ], and output to the device specified by [ The bias value is added as shown below:...
  • Page 673 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control Program examples 1. Program example 1 In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the zone from “-1000” to “+1000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.

  • Page 674: Fnc259 - Scl / Scaling (Coordinate By Point Data)

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) Outline This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
  • Page 675 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) 2. 32-bit operation (DSCL and DSCLP) The input value specified in [ ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and stored to a device number specified in [ ].
  • Page 676 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling Setting device and setting contents When R0 is specified in Set item Remarks...
  • Page 677 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) Program example In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.

  • Page 678: Fnc260 - Dabin / Decimal Ascii To Bin Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Outline This instruction converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) into binary data.
  • Page 679 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion 2. 32-bit operation (DDABIN and DDABINP) Data stored in +5 expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) is converted into 32-bit binary data, and stored in [ Command input...
  • Page 680 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion Program example In the program below, the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.

  • Page 681: Fnc261 - Binda / Bin To Decimal Ascii Conversion

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Outline This instruction converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H).
  • Page 682 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression). 0 0 3 2 5 Effective digits +3 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.
  • Page 683 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion Related devices Device Name Description • For 16-bit operation When M8091 is OFF, +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)."...

  • Page 684: Fnc269 - Scl2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate By X/Y Data)

    Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) Outline This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
  • Page 685 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) 2. 32-bit operation (DSCL2 and DSCL2P) The input value specified in [ ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and stored to a device number specified in [ ].
  • Page 686 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling Setting device and setting contents Set item Remarks Setting...
  • Page 687 Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data) Program example In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.

  • Page 688: External Device Communication Inverter Communication) – Fnc270 To Fnc275

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30. External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 FNC270 to FNC275 provide instructions for controlling operations and reading/writing parameters while two or more FREQROL inverters are connected.

  • Page 689: Fnc270 - Ivck / Inverter Status Check

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check Outline This instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to a PLC using the computer link operation function of the inverter.
  • Page 690 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check 2. Inverter instruction codes The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in .

  • Page 691: Fnc271 - Ivdr / Inverter Drive

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive Outline This instruction writes a inverter operation required control value to an inverter using the computer link operation function of the inverter.
  • Page 692 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive 2. Inverter instruction codes The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in For instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.

  • Page 693: Fnc272 - Ivrd / Inverter Parameter Read

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read Outline This instruction reads an inverter parameter to the PLC using the computer link operation function of the inverter. This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K12) instruction in the FX Series.
  • Page 694 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Number Number Description...

  • Page 695: Fnc273 - Ivwr / Inverter Parameter Write

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write Outline This instruction writes an inverter parameter of an inverter using the computer link operation function of the inverter. This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K13) instruction in the FX Series.
  • Page 696 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Number Number Description...

  • Page 697: Fnc274 - Ivbwr / Inverter Parameter Block Write

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write Outline This instruction writes parameters of an inverter at one time using the computer link operation function of the inverter.
  • Page 698 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write 2. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Number Number Description...

  • Page 699: Fnc275 - Ivmc / Inverter Multi Command

    Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command Outline This instruction writes 2 types of settings (operation command and set frequency) to the inverter, and reads 2 types of data (inverter status monitor, output frequency, etc.) from the inverter at the same time.
  • Page 700 Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC275 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.6 FNC275 – IVMC / Inverter Multi Command 3. Related devices → For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. Number Number Description...

  • Page 701: 31. Data Transfer 3 - Fnc276 To Fnc279

    Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 FNC275 to FNC279 provide instructions for executing more complicated processing for fundamental applied instructions and for special processing.

  • Page 702: Fnc278 - Rbfm / Divided Bfm Read

    Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Outline This instruction reads data from continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function block/unit over several operation cycles by the time division method.

  • Page 703: Common Items Between Rbfm (Fnc278) Instruction And Wbfm (Fnc279) Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Related devices → For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
  • Page 704 Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Cautions • A watchdog timer error may occur when many numbers of points are transferred in one operation cycle. In such a case, take one of the following countermeasures: - Change the watchdog timer time By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time is changed (initial...
  • Page 705 Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read Program example In the example shown below, data is read from and written to the buffer memories (BFM) in the unit No. 2 as follows: •...

  • Page 706: Fnc279 - Wbfm / Divided Bfm Write

    Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write Outline This instruction writes data to continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function block/unit over several operation cycles by the time division method.
  • Page 707 Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC276 to FNC279 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write Related devices → For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

  • Page 708: 32. High-Speed Processing 2 - Fnc280 To Fnc289

    Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32. High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference High-Speed Counter Compare With Data HSCT Section 32.1 HSCT Table −...

  • Page 709: Fnc280 - Hsct / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

    Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Outline This instruction compares the current value of a high-speed counter with a data table of comparison points, and then sets or resets up to 16 output devices.
  • Page 710 Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Operation output setting (SET [1] or RESET [0]) [Up to 16 points] Operation 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 output setting...
  • Page 711 Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Operation example X010 FNC280 D200 C235 Y010 DHSCT M8000 FNC 54 K900 C235 C235...
  • Page 712 Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Cautions • This instruction can be executed only once in a program. If this instruction is programmed two or more times, an operation error is caused by the second instruction and later, and the instruction will not be executed.
  • Page 713 Series Programmable Controllers 32 High-Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High-Speed Counter Compare With Data Table Program example In the program shown below, the current value of C235 (counting X000) is compared with the comparison data table set in R0 and later, and a specified pattern is output to Y010 to Y013.

  • Page 714: 33. Extension File Register Control - Fnc290 To Fnc299

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference LOADR Load From ER Section 33.1 LOADR SAVER Save to ER...

  • Page 715: Fnc290 - Loadr / Load From Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER Outline This instruction reads the current values of extension file registers (ER) stored in the attached memory cassette (flash memory or EEPROM) or EEPROM built into the PLC, and transfers them to extension registers (R) stored in the RAM in the PLC.
  • Page 716 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER In FX PLCs a) When a memory cassette is connected The contents (current values) of extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (EEPROM) with the same numbers as the extension registers specified by +n-1 are read, and transferred to the extension registers specified by...
  • Page 717 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER Caution 1. Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers. •...

  • Page 718: Fnc291 - Saver / Save To Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Outline This instruction writes the current values of the extension registers (R) stored in the PLC's built-in RAM to extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) in sector units (2048 points).
  • Page 719 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER • Extension file registers are written in sector units (2048 points). The table below shows the head device number in each sector: Sector Sector Head device number...
  • Page 720 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER 2. Initialization of extension file registers Execute the INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292) instruction to target extension file registers (ER) before executing the SAVER instruction.
  • Page 721 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.
  • Page 722 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Program examples In the case of FX PLCs Ver. 1.30 or later and FX PLCs Ver.
  • Page 723 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Setting data Setting backup data Extension file registers Extension registers (R) Number of (ER) already written Current...
  • Page 724 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER In the case of FX PLCs before Ver.1.30 In the example shown below, only extension registers R10 to R19 (in sector 0) need to be updated in the extension file registers (ER).
  • Page 725 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER Setting data Setting backup data Setting data Extension file registers Extension registers (R) Unused extension registers (ER) Device number Current...

  • Page 726: Fnc292 - Initr / Initialize R And Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER Outline This instruction initializes extension registers (R) to “HFFFF” (<K-1>) in the RAM built into the PLC and extension file registers in a memory cassette (flash memory) before data logging using the LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
  • Page 727 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER The table below shows the head device number in each sector: Sector Head device Sector...
  • Page 728 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER • Setting the WDT (FNC 07) instruction just before and after the INITR instruction as shown below: Command input FNC 07...

  • Page 729: Fnc293 - Logr / Logging R And Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER Outline This instruction logs specified devices, and stores the logged data to extension registers (R) in the RAM and extension file registers (ER) in a memory cassette.
  • Page 730 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER Logging data format Number of stored data Destination storing 1st logging data →...
  • Page 731 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER 2. Caution on using a memory cassette Flash memory is adopted in a memory cassette. Make sure to initialize the data storage area in sector units before starting logging.
  • Page 732 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER 5) To the PLC, write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Developer. [1] Select “Online”...

  • Page 733: Fnc294 - Rwer / Rewrite To Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER Outline This instruction writes the current values of an arbitrary number of extension registers (R) stored in the RAM in the PLC to extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory or EEPROM) or the EEPROM built into the PLC.
  • Page 734 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER In FX PLCs a) When a memory cassette is connected The contents (current values) of “n” extension registers (R) starting from are written (transferred) to extension file registers having with same device numbers in a memory cassette (flash memory).
  • Page 735 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER Cautions 1. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette (flash memory) for FX PLCs Memory cassettes use flash memory.
  • Page 736 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER 3. Allowable number of writes to the memory Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers. •...
  • Page 737 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER [3]Select “Ext. file register” and “Ext. register” on the “Device data” tab. In GX Developer before Ver.8.18U, the extension file register range FX3U(C)*2 cannot be set.
  • Page 738 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER Operation Setting backup data Setting data Extension file registers Extension registers (R) (ER) Device number Current Device number Current...

  • Page 739: Fnc295 - Initer / Initialize Er

    Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER Outline This instruction initializes extension file registers (ER) to “HFFFF” (<K-1>) in a memory cassette (flash memory) before executing the SAVER (FNC291) instruction.
  • Page 740 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER Operation • Extension file registers (ER) [inside the memory cassette] Current value Device number Before execution After execution H1234...
  • Page 741 Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER Errors An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in D8067.

  • Page 742: Fx 3U -Cf-Adp Applied Instructions - Fnc300 To Fnc305

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34. FX -CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference FLCRT File create / check Section 34.1 FLCRT FLDEL File delete / CF card format...

  • Page 743: Fnc 300 - Flcrt / File Create•Check

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 • Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.1 FNC 300 – FLCRT / File create check 34.1 FNC 300 – FLCRT / File create•check Outline The FLCRT instruction creates a file inside the CompactFlash card mounted in the FX -CF-ADP.

  • Page 744: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition • 34.1 FNC 300 – FLCRT / File create check 34.1.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLCRT instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...

  • Page 745: Fnc 301 - Fldel / File Delete•Cf Card Format

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 • Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.2 FNC 301 – FLDEL / File delete CF card format 34.2 FNC 301 – FLDEL / File delete•CF card format Outline The FLDEL instruction deletes files stored in the CompactFlash card, or formats the CompactFlash...

  • Page 746: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition • 34.2 FNC 301 – FLDEL / File delete CF card format 34.2.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLDEL instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...

  • Page 747: Fnc 302 - Flwr / Data Write

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3 FNC 302 – FLWR / Data write 34.3 FNC 302 – FLWR / Data write Outline The FLWR instruction writes data to the CompactFlash card or to the buffer inside the FX -CF-ADP.
  • Page 748 Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3 FNC 302 – FLWR / Data write The FLWR instruction writes data specified by the device to a file stored in the CompactFlash card specified by the file ID or to the buffer inside the CF-ADP.

  • Page 749: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.3 FNC 302 – FLWR / Data write 34.3.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLWR instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...

  • Page 750: Fnc 303 - Flrd / Data Read

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.4 FNC 303 – FLRD / Data read 34.4 FNC 303 – FLRD / Data read Outline The FLRD instruction reads data from the CompactFlash card.

  • Page 751: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.4 FNC 303 – FLRD / Data read 34.4.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLRD instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...

  • Page 752: Fnc 304 - Flcmd / Fx

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.5 FNC 304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command 34.5 FNC 304 – FLCMD / FX -CF-ADP command Outline The FLCMD instruction gives instruction for operation to the FX -CF-ADP.

  • Page 753: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.5 FNC 304 – FLCMD / FX3U-CF-ADP command 34.5.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLCMD instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...

  • Page 754: Fnc 305 - Flstrd / Fx

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.6 FNC 305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read 34.6 FNC 305 – FLSTRD / FX -CF-ADP status read Outline The FLSTRD instruction reads the status (including the error information and file information) of the FX -CF-ADP.

  • Page 755: Detailed Explanation Of Setting Data

    Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.6 FNC 305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read 34.6.1 Detailed explanation of setting data Details on the setting data in the FLSTRD instruction are as shown below. Setting items Description Data Type...
  • Page 756 Series Programmable Controllers 34 FX3U-CF-ADP Applied Instructions – FNC300 to FNC305 Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 34.6 FNC 305 – FLSTRD / FX3U-CF-ADP status read • When is "K768 (H300)" The FLSTRD instruction reads the version information of the CF-ADP. Setting items Description Stores the version of CF-ADP.

  • Page 757: 35. Sfc Program And Step Ladder

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35. SFC Program and Step Ladder This chapter explains the programming procedures and sequence operations for the “SFC” and “step ladder” programming methods in GX Developer.
  • Page 758 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program State relay number Internal circuit When X001 turns ON Y030 Y030 Activated Y31 programmed in the SET instruction X001 X001 remains ON even TRAN TRAN...

  • Page 759: Sfc Program Creating Procedure

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.3 SFC program creating procedure Create an SFC program using the following procedure: 1. Operation example Start Moving forward 1st time Moving Stop Moving...
  • Page 760 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 3. Assigning devices Assign devices of a PLC in the created process drawing. Assign a state relay to a rectangle indicating a process. At this time, assign a state relay (S0 to S9) to the initial process.
  • Page 761 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 4. Inputting and indicating a program using GX Developer • Input a circuit for setting the initial state relay to ON using the relay ladder. In this example, the initial state relay S0 is set to ON in a ladder block using the special auxiliary relay M8002 which turns ON momentarily when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.

  • Page 762: Handling And Role Of Initial State Relay

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.4 Handling and role of initial state relay Handling of the initial state relay • A state relay located at the head of an SFC program is the initial state relay. Only state relays S0 to S9 are available.

  • Page 763: Latched (Battery Backed) Type State Relays

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.5 Latched (battery backed) type state relays In the latched (battery backed) type state relays, the ON/OFF status is backed up by the battery or EEPROM memory against power failure.
  • Page 764 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Operation of state relays and use of an output two or more times Y001 • In different state relays, the same output device (Y002 in this example) can be programmed as shown in the right figure.
  • Page 765 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Operation of “ ” and “ ” Use “ ” to express transfer to a state relay in an upper position (repeat), transfer to a state relay in a lower position (jump), or transfer to a state relay in a separate flow.
  • Page 766 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Resetting multiple state relays at one time and output disable For output disability corresponding to emergency stop, follow “Cautions on safety” described in the PLC manual. Resetting multiple state relays at one time by specifying a range Resetting fifty-one state relays from S0 to S50 are reset time.
  • Page 767 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Programming complicated transfer conditions In a transfer condition circuit, the ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD and MPP instructions are not available. Program the circuit as shown below: X004 X004...
  • Page 768 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 2. Procedure using a pulse contact instruction (M2800 (Transfer input) X001 to M3071) Ladder block M2800 By using an auxiliary relay M2800 to M3071 in a rising/falling M2800 edge detection instruction (LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP or ORF), the ON status can be efficiently transferred by the same...

  • Page 769: Sfc Flow Formats

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.8 SFC flow formats This section shows operation patterns of single flows and operation patterns when selective branches and parallel branches are combined in SFC programs.
  • Page 770 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Separation of flow When creating an SFC program having two or more initial state relays, separate the blocks for each initial state relay. The ON status can be transferred among SFC programs created by block separation (jump to a different flow).
  • Page 771 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Composite flows with branches and recombination The single flow format is the fundamental style in process transfer control. Only single flow is sufficient in sequence control for simple operations.

  • Page 772: Program Of Branch/Recombination State Relays

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.9 Program of branch/recombination state relays Selective branch After making a branch, create a transfer condition. X000 X001 X002 TRAN TRAN TRAN Selective recombination...

  • Page 773: 35.1.10 Rule For Creating Branch Circuit

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 35.1.10 Rule for creating branch circuit Limitation in the number of branch circuits In one parallel branch or selective branch, up to eight circuits can be provided. When there are many parallel branches and selective branches, however, the total number of circuits per initial state is limited to 16 or less.
  • Page 774 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Composition of branches/recombination and dummy state 1. When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay When a recombination line is directly connected to a branch line without a state relay as shown below, it is necessary to provide a dummy state relay between the lines.
  • Page 775 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 2. When there are selective branches continuously, reduce the number of branches. X000 X010 TRAN TRAN X014 X001 X004 X011 TRAN TRAN TRAN...
  • Page 776 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 3. It is not permitted to provide a selective transfer condition * after parallel branches or to recombine parallel branches after a transfer condition < * >. <*>...

  • Page 777: 35.1.11 Program Examples

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 6. It is not permitted to cross flows in SFC programs. Change a flow on the left to a flow on the right. This change enables inverse conversion from a program on the instruction word basis into an SFC program.
  • Page 778 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 2. Example of fountain control Cyclic operation (X001 = OFF, X002 = OFF) When the start button X000 is pressed, the outputs turn ON in the order “Y000 (wait indication) → Y001 (center lamp) →...
  • Page 779 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 3. Example of cam shaft turning control The limit switches X013 and X011 are provided in two X000 positions, large forward rotation angle and small forward Start rotation angle.
  • Page 780 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program 4. Example of sequential start and stop The motors M1 to M4 are started in turn by a timer, and stopped in turn in the reverse order. This SFC flow is based on a single flow, and has jumps of state relays.
  • Page 781 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program The partial skip flow shown on the previous page can be expressed in a flow of selective branches and recombination as shown below.
  • Page 782 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Examples of flows having selective branches and recombination 1. Operation of selective branch • When two or more flows are provided and either one is selected and executed, it is called a selective branch.
  • Page 783 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program In an SFC program for selecting large or small products and judging products as either accepted or rejected, selective branches and recombination are adopted as shown in the figure below. Ladder block M8002 Initial pulse...
  • Page 784 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Example of flows having parallel branches and recombination 1. Operation of parallel branch • Branches in which all flows proceed at the same time are called parallel branches.
  • Page 785 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.1 SFC Program Ladder block M8002 Initial pulse SFC block Y003 Road: Green Y005 Sidewalk: Red X000 TRAN X001 Crossing button Road: Y003 Y005 Sidewalk: Red Green...

  • Page 786: Step Ladder

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2.1 Outline In programs using step ladder instructions, a state relay State S is assigned to each process based on machine operations, and sequences of input condition and output control are programmed as circuits connected to contacts (STL contacts) of state relays in the same way as SFC programs.
  • Page 787 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Y030 Y030 Process of Y31 programmed in the When X001 turns ON, SET in struction remains S32 turns ON and S31 ON even if S31 is reset.

  • Page 788: Expression Of Step Ladder

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2.3 Expression of step ladder Step ladder programs and SFC programs are substantially the same as described above, but actual programs are expressed as shown below.

  • Page 789: Creation Of Step Ladder Program (Sfc Program → Stl Program)

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Creation of step ladder program (SFC program → STL program) 35.2.4 The figure on the left shows one state relay extracted as an example from an SFC program. Each state relay has three functions, driving a load, specifying a transfer destination and specifying a transfer condition.

  • Page 790: Preliminary Knowledge For Creating Step Ladder Programs

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 2. Program for the transfer destination There is no change in programming especially for the transfer destination. <SFC program> <Step ladder> <List program>...
  • Page 791 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Special auxiliary relays For efficiently creating step ladder programs, it is necessary to use some special auxiliary relays. The table below shows major ones.
  • Page 792 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Output driving method It is required to include a LD or LDI instruction before the last OUT instruction in a state relay. Change such a circuit as shown below.

  • Page 793: Program With State Relays In Branches And Recombination

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2.6 Program with state relays in branches and recombination 1. Example of selective branch Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a transfer processing program with branches and recombination.
  • Page 794 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 2. Example of selective recombination Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a transfer processing program with branches and recombination.
  • Page 795 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 4. Example of parallel recombination Do not use MPS, MRD, MPP, ANB and ORB instructions in a program with branches and recombination. Even in a load driving circuit, MPS instructions cannot be used immediately after STL instructions.
  • Page 796 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Parallel recombination and parallel branch <SFC program> <Step ladder> <List program> X000 X000 S101 X000 TRAN S101 S101 S101 Dummy state S101 S101 S101...

  • Page 797: Program Examples

    Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 35.2.7 Program examples Examples of single flows 1. Example of flicker circuit • When the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN, the state relay S3 is driven by the initial pulse (M8002). •...
  • Page 798 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder 2. Example of fountain control Cyclic operation (X001 = OFF, X002 = OFF) When the start button X000 is pressed, the outputs turn ON in the order “Y000 (wait indication) → Y001 (center lamp) →...
  • Page 799 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Examples of flows with selective branches and recombination 1. Example of selecting and carrying large and small balls The figure below shows a mechanism which selects and carries large and small balls using conveyors. The upper left position is regarded as the origin, and the mechanism performs in the order “moving down →...
  • Page 800 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder The figure below shows a step ladder program for selecting the product size and judging products as either accepted or rejected. <Step ladder>...
  • Page 801 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder Example of flows with parallel branches and recombination When the parts A, B and C are processed in parallel and then assembled, flows having parallel branches and recombination are used.
  • Page 802 Series Programmable Controllers 35 SFC Program and Step Ladder Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 35.2 Step Ladder <Step ladder> M8002 Initial pulse Road: Y003 Green Sidewalk: Sidewalk: Y005 Y005 X000 X001 Crossing button Road: Y003 Green K300 Sidewalk: Y005 <List program>...

  • Page 803: 36. Interrupt Function And Pulse Catch Function

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.1 Outline 36. Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function This chapter explains the built-in interrupt function and pulse catch function in FX PLCs. 36.1 Outline This section explains the function to immediately execute an interrupt program (interrupt routine) without affecting the...

  • Page 804: Common Items

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items 36.2 Common Items 36.2.1 How to disable interrupt function and pulse catch function This section describes how to disable the interrupt function and pulse catch function. 1.

  • Page 805: Related Items

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items Program example In the program example shown below, when M8053 is set to ON by M20, the interrupt input I301 triggered by X003 is disabled.
  • Page 806 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items 3. Operation when a timer is used [interrupt function] Make sure that counting using a general timer is disabled, even a 1ms retentive type timer. In an interrupt routine, use timers for routine program T192 to T199.
  • Page 807 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.2 Common Items Example in which latched outputs are reset (countermeasures) Program example FNC 04 Step 0 X001 X002 Program to reset Y007 at an arbitrary Y007 time.

  • Page 808: Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered By External Signal) [Without Delay Function]

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 36.3.1 Input interrupt (interrupt triggered by external signal) [without delay function] 1.
  • Page 809 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 5. How to disable each interrupt input When any among M8050 to M8055 is set to ON in a program, interrupts from the corresponding input number are disabled.
  • Page 810 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] When using both an input interrupt and the input refresh (REF instruction) In the program example shown below, an interrupt is processed using the latest input information.
  • Page 811 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] When catching a short pulse In the program example shown below, the ON status is held for a certain period of time after a short pulse turns Pulse input X003 Step...

  • Page 812: Examples Of Practical Programs (Programs To Measure Short Pulse Width)

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] 36.3.2 Examples of practical programs (programs to measure short pulse width) By using a 1 ms retentive type timer or the special data register D8099 (high-speed ring counter), the short pulse width can be measured in 1 ms or 0.1 ms units.
  • Page 813 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] -Timing chart X010: Preparation for measurement I001(Interrupt processing) I100(Interrupt processing) SW(X000,X001) T246 Part A in the previous page Part B in the previous page...

  • Page 814: Input Interrupt (Interrupt By External Signal) [With Delay Function]

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.4 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] 36.4 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] 1. Outline An input interrupt has the function to delay execution of an interrupt routine in units of 1 ms.
  • Page 815 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 3. Basic program (programming procedure) Main program Step Timer interrupts are enabled after the EI instruction. FNC 04 Interrupts are It is not necessary to program DI (disable...

  • Page 816: Examples Of Practical Program (Timer Interrupt Programs Using Applied Instruction)

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 6. Program example → For program examples in which RAMP (FNC 67) or HKY (FNC 71) instructions are combined, refer to Subsection 36.5.2.
  • Page 817 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle) 2. Timer interrupt processing of RAMP (FNC 67) instruction The ramp signal output circuit shown below is programmed using the timer interrupt function executed every 10 ms. →...

  • Page 818: Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered By Counting Up Of High-Speed Counter

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.6 Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High-Speed Counter 36.6 Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High-Speed Counter 1.

  • Page 819: Pulse Catch Function [M8170 To M8177]

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.7 Pulse Catch Function [M8170 to M8177] 36.7 Pulse Catch Function [M8170 to M8177] When the input relay X000 to X007 turns from OFF to ON after the EI (FNC 04) instruction is executed, the special auxiliary relay M8170 to M8177 is set for interrupt processing.

  • Page 820: Pulse Width/Pulse Period Measurement Function [M8075 To M8079, D8074 To D8097]

    Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] The pulse width/pulse period measurement function stores the values of 1/6 μs ring counters at the input signal rising edge and falling edge to special data registers.
  • Page 821 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] Pulse period measurement The pulse period of the input signal from X000 is measured. X000 This duration is measured.
  • Page 822 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] Signal delay time measurement The delay time from the rising edge of the input signal from X000 to the rising edge of the input signal from X001 is measured.
  • Page 823 Series Programmable Controllers 36 Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 36.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] The ring counter offers 32-bit data including the most significant bit. The DSUB (FNC21) instruction does not give a correct value because it handles the most significant bit as the sign bit.

  • Page 824: Operation Of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -)

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37. Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays (indicated as "special M"...
  • Page 825 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Clock [M]8010 Not used...
  • Page 826 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device PLC Mode When M8030 set to ON, LED on PLC is not lit even if M 8030...
  • Page 827 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Step Ladder and Annunciator (Refer to ANS (FNC 46), ANR (FNC 47), IST (FNC 60), and Chapter 35 for details.) M 8040 While M8040 is turned ON, transfer between states is...
  • Page 828 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Error Detection (Refer to Chapter 38 for details.) [M]8060 I/O configuration error...
  • Page 829 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Pulse width/Pulse period measurement [FX PLCs ] [M]8074...
  • Page 830 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Memory Information [M]8101 –...
  • Page 831 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device High-Speed Counter Comparison, High-Speed Table, and Positioning [Positioning is supported in FX , FX , FX...
  • Page 832 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Advanced Function SWAP function of XCH (FNC 17) –...
  • Page 833 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device N:N Network (Refer to FX Series User’s Manual - Data Communication Edition for details.) [M]8180 –...
  • Page 834 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction (Refer to Section 4.6 for details.) M 8200 C200...
  • Page 835 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device High-Speed Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction (Refer to Section 4.7 for details.) M 8235 C235...
  • Page 836 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Flags [M]8300 to [M]8303 Not used...
  • Page 837 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Timing Clock (Refer to Section 24.3 for details.) and Positioning [FX , FX and FX...
  • Page 838 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device Positioning [FX PLCs] (Refer to Positioning Control Manual for details.) [M]8370...
  • Page 839 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.) [M]8400 Not used...
  • Page 840 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Operation and function ing special device -CF-ADP [ch1] (Refer to CF-ADP Manual for details.) [M]8400 to [M]8401 Not used...

  • Page 841: Special Data Register (D8000 To D8511)

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) 37.1.2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device...
  • Page 842 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device PLC Status [D]8007 Operation frequency of M8007 is stored.
  • Page 843 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Input Filter Input filter value of X000 to X017 D 8020...
  • Page 844 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Stepladder and Annunciator [D]8040 ON state number 1...
  • Page 845 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Parallel Link (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.) [D]8070 Parallel link error time-out check time: 500 ms...
  • Page 846 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Pulse width/Pulse period measurement [FX PLCs ] Lower [X000] Ring counter value for rising edge...
  • Page 847 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Memory Information [D]8101 1 0 0...
  • Page 848 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device High-Speed Counter Comparison, High-Speed Table, and Positioning [Positioning is supported in FX , FX , FX...
  • Page 849 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Inverter Communication Function (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.) Response wait time of inverter communication [ch1] –...
  • Page 850 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Advanced Function [D]8160 –...
  • Page 851 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 [D]8182 Value of Z1 register...
  • Page 852 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Analog Special Adapter [FX , FX ] (Refer to Subsection 37.2.19 for applicability of each analog special adapter.)
  • Page 853 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Syntax, Circuit, Operation, or Unconnected I/O Designation Error Step Number (Refer to Chapter 38 for details.) D 8312 Lower Operation error step number latched...
  • Page 854 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Timing Clock (Refer to Section 24.3 for details.) and Positioning [FX and FX PLCs] (Refer to Positioning Control Edition for details.)
  • Page 855 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device Interrupt Program (Refer to Chapter 36 for details.) Delay time D 8393...
  • Page 856 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2] (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.) D 8420 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Communication format setting...
  • Page 857 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) Applicable model Correspond- Number and name Content of register ing special device -CF-ADP [ch2] (Refer to CF-ADP Manual for details.) [D]8420 to [D]8421 Not used...

  • Page 858: Supplement Of Special Devices (M8000 - And D8000 -)

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) This section explains how to use the provided special devices to activate built-in PLC functions for additional program control.

  • Page 859: Watchdog Timer [D8000]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.2 Watchdog timer [D8000] The watchdog timer monitors the operation (scan) time of the PLC. When the operation is not completed within the specified time, ERROR (ERR) LED light turns on and all outputs are turned OFF.

  • Page 860: Power Failure Detection Time [D8008, M8008 And M8007]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.4 Power failure detection time [D8008, M8008 and M8007] 1. FX PLC (AC power supply type) The table below shows the allowable momentary power failure time in FX PLCs (AC power supply type).

  • Page 861: Real Time Clock [M8015 To M8019 And D8013 To D8019]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.7 Real time clock [M8015 to M8019 and D8013 to D8019] 1.

  • Page 862: How To Set Real Time Clock

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.8 How to set real time clock The real time clock is set by the following method. 1.
  • Page 863 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 2. Method by program Method using TWR (FNC167) instruction dedicated to time setting. →...

  • Page 864: Input Filter Adjustment [D8020]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.9 Input filter adjustment [D8020] The inputs X000 to X017 have a digital filter circuit with a setting range of 0 to 60 ms.

  • Page 865: Battery [Batt (Bat)] Led And [Alm] Led Off Command [M8030]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.10 Battery [BATT (BAT)] LED and [ALM] LED OFF command [M8030] When M8030 is set to ON, the battery LED does not turn ON even if the voltage in the battery for memory backup becomes low.

  • Page 866: Built-In Analog Volume [D8030 And D8031]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.11 Built-in analog volume [D8030 and D8031] Values of variable analog potentiometers built in FX PLCs as standard are stored as numeric data ranging from 0 to 255 in the following special registers in accordance with the scale position.

  • Page 867: All Outputs Disable [M8034]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.14 All outputs disable [M8034] When M8034 is turned ON, the output memory is cleared. As a result, all actual output relay contacts are turned OFF and the PLC is operated in the image memory.

  • Page 868: Constant Scan Mode [M8039 And D8039]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 4. RUN/STOP command via the programming tool Using the programming software for personal computer There is a remote RUN/STOP function in the programming software.

  • Page 869: Analog Expansion Boards [M8260 To M8279 And D8260 To D8279]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.18 Analog expansion boards [M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279] When the analog expansion board is connected, operations and functions are assigned to devices shown in the table below in accordance with the connection position.
  • Page 870 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 2. Special data register (D8260 to D8279) • FX Operation and function Number -2AD-BD -1DA-BD...

  • Page 871: Analog Special Adapters [M8260 To M8299 And D8260 To D8299]

    Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 37.2.19 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299] When analog special adapters are connected, operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters.
  • Page 872 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Operation and function Number -4AD-PT(W)-ADP -4AD-TC-ADP -4AD-PNK-ADP Applicable Ver.1.30 or later Ver.1.30 or later Ver.1.30 or later version...
  • Page 873 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) • FX PLCs Operation and function Number -4AD-ADP -4DA-ADP -3A-ADP Applicable Ver.1.00 or later Ver.1.00 or later...
  • Page 874 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) 2. Special data registers (D8260 to D8299) • FX Operation and function Number -4AD-ADP -4DA-ADP...
  • Page 875 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Operation and function Number -4AD-PT(W)-ADP -4AD-TC-ADP -4AD-PNK-ADP Applicable Ver.1.30 or later Ver.1.30 or later Ver.1.30 or later version...
  • Page 876 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) • FX PLCs Operation and function Number -4AD-ADP -4DA-ADP -3A-ADP Applicable Ver.1.00 or later Ver.1.00 or later...
  • Page 877 Series Programmable Controllers 37 Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 37.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) Operation and function Number -4AD-PT(W)-ADP -4AD-TC-ADP -4AD-PNK-ADP Applicable Ver.1.00 or later Ver.1.00 or later Ver.1.00 or later version...

  • Page 878: 38. Error Check Method And Error Code List

    ON again, and verify that the status is changed. • The wiring is incorrect. If the status is not improved, consult a Mitsubishi Electric • There is fault inside the PLC. representative. One of the following has occurred: When the power is not OFF, check the power supply and power •...

  • Page 879: Batt (Bat) Led [Lit Or Unlit] [Fx 3U /Fx 3Uc ]

    Add a noise filter in the power line. 3) If the ERROR (ERR) LED is not off even after the step 1) or 2), consult a Mitsubishi Electric representative. One of the following errors occur in PLC: •...

  • Page 880: L Run Led [Fx 3Uc -32Mt-Lt(-2)]

    Make sure that the power is correctly supplied to the PLC. Unlit (This LED is off • If the L RUN LED is not off even after the above check, consult a while the self-loopback test Mitsubishi Electric representative. is executing.) -32MT-LT only. 38.1.7 L ERR LED [FX -32MT-LT(-2)]...

  • Page 881: Error Code Check Method And Indication

    Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 38.2.1 Error code check method by display module The error code can be checked by programming tool and display module.

  • Page 882: Error Code Check Method By Gx Developer

    Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 38.2.2 Error code check method by GX Developer Connect a personal computer to PLC. Execute PLC diagnostics.

  • Page 883: Error Indication

    Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication 38.2.3 Error indication The table below shows the error expression in this manual, GX Works2, GX Developer, and display modules (FX 7DM).

  • Page 884: Supplementary Explanation Of Devices For Error Detection

    Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection 38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection 38.3.1 Error detection (M8060 to/D8060 to) When the M8060, M8061, M8064 to M8067 turn ON, the smallest ON device number is stored in D8004, and M8004 turns ON.

  • Page 885: Operations Of Special Devices For Error Detection

    Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection 38.3.2 Operations of special devices for error detection Special auxiliary relays for error detection and special data registers for error detection operate in the relationship shown below.

  • Page 886: Error Code List And Action

    • Series PLC 3830 If the problem persists, something may be malfunctioning Memory cassette write error inside the PLC. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. PLC hardware error [M8061(D8061)] ⎯ 0000 No error When the memory cassette is used, check whether it is mounted correctly.
  • Page 887 Link/LT special function block. Set the configuration again. If the problem persists, something may be malfunctioning A built-in CC-Link/LT special function block EEPROM inside the PLC. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric writing time-out error occurred, or the built-in CC-Link/LT 6115 representative.
  • Page 888 When the memory cassette is used, check whether it is mounted correctly. • Series PLC 6330 If the problem persists, something may be malfunctioning Memory cassette write error inside the PLC. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. Parameter error [M8064(D8064)] ⎯ 0000 No error 6401...
  • Page 889 Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.4 Error Code List and Action Error PLC operation at Contents of error Action code error occurrence Circuit error [M8066(D8066)] ⎯ 0000 No error 6610...
  • Page 890 Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.4 Error Code List and Action Error PLC operation at Contents of error Action code error occurrence Operation error [M8067(D8067)] ⎯ 0000 No error •...
  • Page 891 Series Programmable Controllers 38 Error Check Method and Error Code List Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 38.4 Error Code List and Action Error PLC operation at Contents of error Action code error occurrence Operation error [M8067(D8067)] <Transpose of output upper limit value and output lower PID output upper limit set value <...
  • Page 892 • Series PLC used, something may be malfunctioning inside the PLC. EEPROM access error. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative. 6771 Memory cassette is not connected. Check for the correct attachment of the memory cassette. The write-protect switch of the memory cassette was set 6772 Memory cassette is protected against writing.

  • Page 893: Appendix A: Programming Tool Applicability And Version Upgrade History

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A: Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Appendix A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A-1-1 Programming tool applicability 1.
  • Page 894 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability • GX Works2 English version (SW DNC-GXW2-E) is applicable to FX PLCs from the following versions. a) FX PLCs Model name Applicable GX Works2...
  • Page 895 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability • GX Developer English version (SW D5C-GPPW-E) is applicable to FX PLCs from the following versions. a) FX PLCs Model name Applicable GX Developer...
  • Page 896 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability 2. In the case of programming tool (version) not applicable to FX , FX and FX PLCs (using an alternative model) Even using a programming tool not applicable to the FX , FX...

  • Page 897: Appendix A-1-2 Cautions On Writing During Run

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A-1-2 Cautions on writing during RUN "In the FX , FX and FX PLCs, writing is enabled during RUN (program changes during RUN mode) using the following programming tools."...
  • Page 898 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability • English version Programming tool Version Remarks Writing in the instruction and device ranges during RUN is supported in FX Ver.
  • Page 899 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Cautions on writing during RUN Item Caution Program memory which can be written in Built-in RAM and optional memory cassette (whose write protect switch is set to OFF) RUN mode •...
  • Page 900 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Item Caution During RUN, avoid writing to a circuit block including the following instructions under execution. If writing is executed during RUN to such a circuit block, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

  • Page 901: Appendix A-1-3 Precautions On Use Of (Built-In Usb) Programming Port

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A-1-3 Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor, device registration monitor, program reading/writing, etc.

  • Page 902: Appendix A-1-4 Cautions On Using Transparent Function By Way Of Usb In Got1000 Series

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A-1-4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series Make sure to provide the following setting when monitoring circuits, monitoring device registration and reading/writing programs in an FX PLC using GX Developer Ver.

  • Page 903: Appendix A-1-5 Cautions On Using Transparent (2-Port) Function Of Got-F900 Series

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-1 Programming Tool Applicability Appendix A-1-5 Cautions on using transparent (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series Make sure to provide the following setting when monitoring circuits, device registration, etc. in an FX PLC using GX Developer Ver.

  • Page 904: Appendix A-2 Peripheral Product Applicability (Except Programming Tools)

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) Appendix A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) Appendix A-2-1 Peripheral product applicability Product Name Applicability Remarks This series is compatible with the FX...
  • Page 905 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools) Product Name Applicability Remarks Applicable The GOT1000 Series is applicable to the device ranges in the FX PLCs.

  • Page 906: Appendix A-3 Version Upgrade History

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-3 Version Upgrade History Appendix A-3 Version Upgrade History Appendix A-3-1 Manufacturer's serial number check method The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT" indicated on the front of the product.

  • Page 907: Appendix A-3-2 Version Check

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-3 Version Upgrade History Appendix A-3-2 Version check Special data register D8001 (decimal) contains information for determining the PLC version. Or for the FX , FX and FX PLCs, the PLC version can be verified in "PLC Status"...

  • Page 908: Appendix A-3-5 Version Upgrade History [Fx 3Uc ]

    Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-3 Version Upgrade History Manufacturer’s Version Contents of version upgrade serial number • Supports the following 3 instructions: VRRD(FNC85), VRSC(FNC86), IVMC(FNC275) 107**** Ver.
  • Page 909 Series Programmable Controllers A Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition A-3 Version Upgrade History Manufacturer’s Version Contents of version upgrade serial number • Supports the following 6 instructions: FLCRT (FNC300), FLDEL (FNC301), FLWR (FNC302), FLRD (FNC303), FLCMD (FNC304), FLSTRD (FNC305) 97**** •...

  • Page 910: Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time

    Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time The instruction execution time in FX , FX and FX PLCs is as shown below: Measurement condition •...
  • Page 911 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Output instructions T192 to T199, T246 to T511...
  • Page 912 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time • FX PLCs (Standard mode) Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction...
  • Page 913 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Output instructions T246 to T319...
  • Page 914 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time • FX PLCs (Extention mode) Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction...
  • Page 915 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Output instructions T246 to T319...

  • Page 916: Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time

    Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time • FX PLCs Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction...

  • Page 917: Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time

    Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time • FX PLCs Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction...
  • Page 918 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Data operation ⎯...
  • Page 919 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction External FX I/O device 141 + 419n...
  • Page 920 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Floating point ⎯...
  • Page 921 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Real time clock control ⎯...
  • Page 922 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Character string control n: Character position...
  • Page 923 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Data comparison For details, refer to...
  • Page 924 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Execution time in ON status (μs) Execution time in OFF status (μs) Instruction Remarks 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction Data move 3 ⎯...
  • Page 925 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time • FX PLCs Standard mode Extension mode Execution time Execution time Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Instruc-...
  • Page 926 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Standard mode Extension mode Execution time Execution time Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Instruc- (μs)
  • Page 927 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Standard mode Extension mode Execution time Execution time Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Instruc- (μs)
  • Page 928 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time Standard mode Extension mode Execution time Execution time Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Execution time in ON status (μs) in OFF status Instruc- (μs)

  • Page 929: Appendix B-5 Execution Time Of Pulse Generation Instruction P In Each Applied Instruction

    Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction Appendix B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction •...
  • Page 930 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction • FX PLCs (Extension mode) Applied instruction Execution time Remarks Execution time at rising edge of input: Execution time in ON status = 5.43 μs MOV instruction (FNC 12) Non-execution time: Execution time in OFF status = 0.81 μs Execution time at rising edge of input: Execution time in ON status = 5.42 μs...

  • Page 931: Appendix B-6 Execution Time On Combination Of Applicable Devices And Indexing

    Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing Appendix B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing In examples shown below for basic instructions, the MOV instruction and data comparison instructions, the instruction execution time varies depending on the combination of target devices and absence/presence of indexing.
  • Page 932 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing • FX PLCs - MOV instruction (16-bit operation) D (destination) Standard mode Extension mode Command Without indexing (μs) With indexing (μs) Without indexing (μs)
  • Page 933 Series Programmable Controllers B Instruction Execution Time Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing • FX PLCs - Data comparison instruction (16-bit operation) D (destination) Standard mode Extension mode Without indexing (μs) With indexing (μs) Without indexing (μs)

  • Page 934: Appendix C: Applied Instruction List [By Instruction Type/In Alphabetic Order]

    Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] Appendix C: Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Appendix C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] Applied instructions are classified into the following nineteen types: Data transfer instructions Program flow control instructions...
  • Page 935 Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] 3. Comparison instructions 6. Special function instructions Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Ref. Page Mnemonic FNC No.
  • Page 936 Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] 9. Data operation instructions 11.Program flow control instructions Ref. Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Mnemonic FNC No.
  • Page 937 Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] 16.Special block/unit control instructions 19.Other handy instructions Ref. Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Mnemonic FNC No. Function Page Page...

  • Page 938: Appendix C-2 Applied Instructions [In Alphabetical Order]

    Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Appendix C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Ref. Page Mnemonic FNC No.
  • Page 939 Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Ref. Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Mnemonic FNC No. Function Page Page FDEL FNC210 Deleting Data from Tables Load Compare LD<...
  • Page 940 Series Programmable Controllers C Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] Ref. Ref. Mnemonic FNC No. Function Mnemonic FNC No. Function Page Page STMR FNC 65 Special Timer FNC 88 PID Control Loop...

  • Page 941: Appendix D: Discontinued Models

    Series Programmable Controllers D Discontinued models Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Appendix D: Discontinued models The table below shows discontinued models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in this manual. Discontinued model Production stop date Repair acceptance period FX-10P(-E) June 30, 2008...
  • Page 942 Series Programmable Controllers D Discontinued models Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition MEMO...

  • Page 943: Warranty

    Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Warranty Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product. 1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be production the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for...

  • Page 944: Revised History

    Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Revised History Revised History Date Created Revision Description 7/2005 First Edition 2/2006 and FX series version 2.30 compatible • Two instructions are added. - MEP, MEF [Section 3.1, Chapter 7, Appendix A-1-2, Appendix 8-1] •...
  • Page 945 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Revised History Date Created Revision Description 3/2007 • Caution on storing sign data of character string is added [Section 26.2]. • The sentence describing rough guide to the watchdog timer set value is modified [Sections 33.3 and 33.6].
  • Page 946 Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition Revised History Date Created Revision Description 7/2011 • Supported in FX series version 1.40 - 1 instruction added. IVMC(FNC275)[Section 30.6] • Supported in FX and FX series version 3.00 - Supports storage of symbolic information.
  • Page 948 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS PROGRAMMING MANUAL Basic & Applied Instructions Edition HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN FX-P3-E MODEL 09R517 MODEL CODE JY997D16601J Effective July. 2011 (MEE) Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This manual is also suitable for:

Fx3u seriesFx3uc series

Table of Contents